HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
RX-F31S
INSTRUCTIONS
LVT1306-009B
[US]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Parts identification ................................................ 2
Getting started ...................................................... 4
Before Installation .................................................................. 4
Checking the supplied accessories ....................................... 4
Putting batteries in the remote control ................................... 4
Setting the voltage selector ................................................... 4
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 5
Connecting the speakers ....................................................... 6
Connecting video components .............................................. 7
Connecting the power cord .................................................. 11
Basic operations ................................................. 12
1 Turn on the power ............................................................. 12
2 Select the source to play .................................................. 12
3 Adjust the volume ............................................................. 13
Selecting the digital decode mode....................................... 13
Adjusting the subwoofer audio position ............................... 14
Activating TV Direct ............................................................. 14
Turning off the sounds temporarily ...................................... 15
Changing the display brightness.......................................... 15
Turning off the power with the Sleep Timer ......................... 15
Basic settings...................................................... 16
Setting the speaker information automatically
—Smart Surround Setup ............................................... 16
Basic setting items ............................................................... 18
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 18
Menu operation buttons................................................... 18
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 19
Menu operating procedure................................................... 20
Setting the items .................................................................. 21
Setting the speakers ....................................................... 21
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting—EX/ES/PLIIx ........... 22
Selecting the main or sub channel—DUAL MONO ......... 23
Setting bass sound.......................................................... 23
Using the Midnight mode—MIDNIGHT MODE ............... 24
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminals
—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3 ................................................... 24
Selecting the component video input mode
—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT ............... 25
Superimposing the menus—SUPERIMPOSE ................ 25
Converting S-video signals into composite video signals
—DOWN MIX............................................................ 25
Converting composite video signals into S-video signals
—Y/C SEPARATE ..................................................... 25
Sound adjustments............................................. 26
Basic adjustment items........................................................ 26
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 26
Menu operation buttons................................................... 26
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 27
Menu operating procedure................................................... 28
Adjusting the items .............................................................. 29
Adjusting speaker output level ........................................ 29
Adjusting the equalization patterns
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz ........ 30
Adjusting the bass sounds .............................................. 30
Adjusting the sound parameters for the
Surround/DSP modes ............................................... 31
Tuner operations ................................................. 32
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing .................................. 32
Tuning in to stations manually.............................................. 32
Using preset tuning .............................................................. 32
Selecting the FM reception mode ........................................ 33
Creating realistic sound fields........................... 34
Reproducing theater ambience ........................................... 34
Introducing the Surround modes ......................................... 34
Introducing the DSP modes................................................. 37
Using the Surround/DSP modes ......................................... 38
Activating the Surround/DSP modes ................................... 39
AV COMPU LINK remote control system .......... 40
Operating other JVC products ........................... 42
Operating other manufacturers’ products ........ 44
Troubleshooting .................................................. 47
Specifications...................................................... 48
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
See pages in parentheses for details.
Parts identification
1
2
TV DIRECT button (14)
Source selecting buttons (12, 14, 32, 33)
DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, DVD MULTI, FM/AM
Operating buttons for tuner (32, 33)
3
4
( TUNING, FM MODE, TUNING 9, MEMORY
On-screen display operation buttons (18, 26)
Cursor buttons (3, 2, 5, ∞),
SET
5
6
7
8
9
SMART SURROUND SETUP button (16)
EX/ES button (22)
SOUND button (13, 14, 22, 24, 30, 31)
SURROUND button (39)
Adjusting buttons for speaker and subwoofer output levels (29)
FRONT L +/–, FRONT R +/–, CENTER +/–, SUBWFR +/–,
SURR L +/–, SURR R +/–, S.BACK +/–
AUDIO button (12, 14)
MUTING button (15)
VOLUME +/– button (13)
Mode selector (12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 26, 29 – 32, 39)
DVR, DVD, AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
MENU button (18, 26)
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
-
REMOTE CONTROL RM SRXF31U
1
2
p
q
w
e
p
r
t
• Numeric buttons (33)
q
w
• Adjusting buttons (13, 14, 24, 30, 31)
DECODE, EQ FREQ, BASS BOOST, C.TONE,
EQ LEVEL 9, MIDNIGHT, EFFECT, EQ LEVEL (,
A.POSITION
e
y
u
i
o
DIMMER button (15)
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (12)
TEST TONE button (17, 29)
3
SLEEP button (15)
r
SET
The buttons which are not indicated here can be used for
operating other JVC products or other manufacturers’ products.
For details, see pages 42 to 46.
4
5
• When operating this receiver, set the mode selector (e)
to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
• When operating a JVC DVD recorder, set the mode
selector (e) to “DVR.”
t
• When operating a JVC DVD player, set the mode selector
(e) to “DVD.”
6
y
u
7
8
9
i
o
To open the cover of the
remote control, push here
then slide downward.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See pages in parentheses for details.
Front panel
1
2
3
4
SOURCE
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
RX-F31
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
/
MULTI JOG
DVR MULTI
DVR
/
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
FM / AM
SET / TUNER PRESET
STANDBY
PHONES
/
ON
TV DIRECT
SETTING
ADJUST
SURROUND
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
1
2
STANDBY/ON button and standby lamp (12, 14, 32)
Source lamps
7
SETTING button (18, 32)
ADJUST button (26, 32)
SURROUND button (39)
Remote sensor (4)
Display window (see below)
• SET button (17, 18, 26)
8
9
p
q
w
DVD MULTI, DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, FM/AM
• SOURCE SELECTOR (12, 14, 33)
• MULTI JOG (18, 26, 33, 39)
MASTER VOLUME control (13)
PHONES jack (13)
3
4
5
6
• TUNER PRESET button (33)
TV DIRECT button (14)
Display window
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
9
0
-
8
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
PL
x
LPCM
L
C
R
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
$
~
! @ #
%
^
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EQ indicator (30)
C.TONE indicator (31)
VIRTUAL SB indicator (38)
and indicator (35)
AUDIO P. (position) indicator (14)
Neo:6 indicator (36)
BASS indicator (30)
Tuner operation indicators (32)
TUNED, ST (stereo)
-
=
ATT (attenuator) indicator (30)
Digital signal format indicators (13, 34 – 36)
LPCM (Linear PCM), DOLBY D (Dolby Digital), DTS, 96/24
Signal and speaker indicators (15)
DSP indicator (36, 37)
AUTO SR (surround) indicator (39)
3D indicator (36, 37)
~
!
@
#
$
%
Main display
Frequency unit indicators
MHz (for FM station), kHz (for AM station)
HP (headphones) indicator (13, 36, 37)
9
0
AUTO MUTING indicator (33)
SLEEP indicator (15)
^
Rear panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
ANTENNA
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
Y
PB
PR
110V
220V
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
PCM/
STREAM
BACK
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
FM 75
VCR
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
DVD MULTI IN
AM EXT
COAXIAL
IN
AUDIO
230 -
240V
L
127V
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
R
AV
VCR
DVR/DVD
IN
SUB-
VCR
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
COMPU
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
DVR
OUT
IN
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
WOOFER
OUT (REC)
(PLAY)
(REC)
(PLAY)
OUT
LINK-III
7
8
9
p q
w
1
2
3
Power cord (11)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (4)
DVD MULTI IN jacks (8)
SUBWOOFER, CENTER, SURR-R, SURR-L
ANTENNA terminals (5)
DIGITAL IN terminals (11)
• Coaxial: 1(DVR/DVD)
• Optical: 2(DBS), 3(VCR)
DIGITAL OUT terminal (11)
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR) jacks (7 – 10)
VCR IN, DVR/DVD IN, MONITOR OUT
8
VIDEO terminals (7 – 10)
VIDEO (composite video) jacks, S-VIDEO terminals
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT
AUDIO jacks (7 – 10)
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN, TV IN
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER OUT jack (6)
AV COMPU LINK-III terminals (40)
SPEAKERS terminals (6)
FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND, SURROUND BACK
4
5
9
p
q
w
6
7
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Putting batteries in the remote control
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.
Getting started
1
2
3
1 Press and slide the battery cover on the back
Before Installation
of the remote control.
2 Insert batteries.
General precautions
• Be sure your hands are dry.
• Turn the power off to all components.
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going
to connect.
Make sure to match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
3 Replace the cover.
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases,
replace the batteries. Use two R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell
batteries.
Locations
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from
moisture and dust.
• Supplied butteries are for initial setup. Replace for continued
use.
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C
and 35˚C.
CAUTION:
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.
• Leave sufficient distance between the receiver and the TV.
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage.
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.
Handling the receiver
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or
cabinet.
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When
unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage
the cord.
• When you are away on travel or otherwise for an extended
period or time, remove the plug from the wall outlet. A small
amount of power is always consumed while the power cord is
connected to the wall outlet.
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on the front panel.
Remote sensor
The receiver has a built-in cooling fan which operates
while the receiver is turned on. Be sure to leave enough
ventilation to obtain sufficient cooling effect.
CAUTION:
To operate the receiver, set
the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all
connections are completed.
Checking the supplied accessories
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied
accessories. If anything is missing, contact your dealer
immediately.
Setting the voltage selector
Before connections, always do the following first if necessary.
Select the correct voltage in VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear
of the receiver by using a screw driver.
• Remote control (× 1)
• Batteries (× 2)
• AM loop antenna (× 1)
• FM antenna (× 1)
• Digital coaxial cable (× 1)
• AC plug adaptor (× 1)
• Check to be sure if the voltage mark is set to the voltage for
your area where this unit plugs in.
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
220V
230 -
240V
127V
Voltage mark
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Snap the tabs on the loop
into the slots of the base to
assemble the AM loop
antenna.
If FM reception is poor, connect an
outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM 75
If AM reception is poor, connect
AM EXT
COAXIAL
an outdoor single vinyl-covered
wire (not supplied).
FM antenna (supplied)
220V
110V
127V
ANTENNA
230 -
240V
NOTES
AM antenna connection
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl,
remove the vinyl while twisting it as shown on the
right.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch
any other terminals, connecting cords and power
cord. This could cause poor reception.
Connect the AM loop antenna supplied to the AM LOOP
terminals.
Connect the white cord to the AM EXT terminal, and connect the
black cord to the H terminal.
Turn the loop until you have the best reception.
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered
wire (not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. Keep the AM loop
antenna connected.
FM antenna connection
Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL
terminal as a temporary measure.
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor FM antenna (not
supplied). Before attaching a 75 Ω coaxial cable with a
connector (IEC or DIN 45325) , disconnect the supplied FM
antenna.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the speakers
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
Speaker Layout Diagram
C
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
SW
RS
L
R
Center speaker (C)
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
LS
SB
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
BACK
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
SPEAKERS
Powered
subwoofer
(SW)
AV
COMPU
LINK-III
SUB-
WOOFER
OUT
Right front speaker
(R)
Left front speaker
(L)
Surround back
speaker (SB)
Right surround
speaker (RS)
Left surround
speaker (LS)
Connecting the speakers
Connecting the powered subwoofer
By connecting a subwoofer, you can enhance the bass or
reproduce the original LFE signals recorded in digital software.
Turn off all components before making connections.
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the
SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cord
with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
2
3
1
1
2
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your subwoofer.
After connecting all the speakers and/or a subwoofer, set the
speaker setting information properly to obtain the best possible
surround effect. For details, see pages 16, 17, and 21 to 23.
1 Twist and remove the insulation at the end of each
NOTE
speaker cord.
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.
2 Press and hold the clamp of the speaker terminal
(1), then insert the speaker cord (2).
• For each speaker, connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the
rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the
speakers.
3 Release the finger from the clamp.
CAUTIONS:
• Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the
speaker terminals (6 Ω – 16 Ω).
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker
terminal.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting video components
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
This receiver is equipped with the following video terminals—
composite video, S-video, and component video terminals.
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or
component video (Y, PB, PR) jacks, connect them using an S-
video cable (not supplied) or component video cable (not
supplied). By using these terminals, you can get a better picture
quality in the order:
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their
manuals.
DO NOT use a TV through a VCR or a TV with a built-in
VCR; otherwise, the picture may be distorted.
Component > S-video > Composite
IMPORTANT:
CAUTION:
Component video signals are transmitted only through component
video output jacks. Therefore, if a recording video component and
a playing video component are connected to the receiver through
the video terminals of different type, you cannot record the picture.
In addition, if the TV and a playing video component are
connected to the receiver through the video terminals of different
type, you cannot view the playback picture on the TV.
On the other hand, S-video signals and composite video signals
can be converted into each other and transmitted through the
corresponding output jack. For details about the settings of the
conversion, see page 25.
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic
equalizer between the source components and this receiver, the
sound output through this receiver may be distorted.
If your video components have AV COMPU LINK terminal
See also page 40 for detailed information about the connection
and the AV COMPU LINK remote control system.
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its stereo output jacks (DVR/DVD):
Red
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
AUDIO
White
Red
DVR
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
OUT
(REC)
OUT (REC)
DVD recorder or
DVD player
Å
ı
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç Î
Composite video cable
(not supplied)
‰ Ï
Ì
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
VCR
IN
DVR/DVD
IN
S-VIDEO
VCR
OUT
(REC)
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
S-video cable (not supplied)
COMPONENT
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel output
NOTES
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right audio channel
input
Ç Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input
Î To composite video output
‰ To S-video output
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input
Ì To component video output
• When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the
component video input jacks, make the component video input
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see
page 25.
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for
a DVD recorder and DVD player is set to use the digital coaxial
terminal (DIGITAL IN 1 (DVR/DVD)). For details of digital
connection, see page 11.
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its analog discrete output jacks (DVD MULTI IN):
This connection is the best connection method for enjoying DVD Audio sounds. When a DVD Audio disc is played back, the original high-
quality sounds can be reproduced only using this connection.
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
Monaural audio cable
(not supplied)
Red
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
Red
AUDIO
White
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
DVR
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
OUT
(REC)
Red
OUT (REC)
DVD MULTI IN
Å ı Ç Î ‰
220V
110V
230 -
240V
127V
Ï
DVD recorder or
DVD player
Ì Ó È Ô
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
Composite video
VCR
IN
cable (not supplied)
DVR/DVD
IN
S-VIDEO
VCR
OUT
(REC)
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT
S-video cable (not supplied)
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right front channel audio output
NOTE
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right front channel
audio input
Ç To left/right surround channel audio output
Î To center channel audio output
‰ To subwoofer output
When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the
component video input jacks, make the component video input
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see
page 25.
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input
Ì To composite video output
Ó To S-video output
È Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input
Ô To component video output
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
About “DVD MULTI”
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source (see page 12), you can enjoy analog discrete output sound (5.1-channel reproduction)
from the connected component.
• You may need to select analog discrete output mode on the component.
NOTES
• When using the headphones, you can listen to the front channel sounds (left and right) only. 3D HEADPHONE mode (see pages 36
and 37) is not available.
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected source—
“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” and “DBS” (see page 14).
• Surround/DSP modes (see pages 34 to 39) are not available for “DVD MULTI.”
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a VCR
Turn off all components before making connections.
Red
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
White
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)
White
Red
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
Å
ı
VCR
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
‰ Ï Ì
Y
PB
PR
Î
Composite video
VCR
IN
cable (not supplied)
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VCR
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
DBS
IN
COMPONENT
S-video cable (not supplied)
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel output
NOTES
ı To left/right audio channel input
Ç To composite video input
Î To composite video output
‰ To S-video output
• When connecting a VCR to the component video input jacks,
make the component video input setting (VCR VIDEO INPUT)
correctly. If you do not, you cannot view the playback picture on
the TV or the AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot
operate properly. For details, see page 25.
Ï To S-video input
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for
a video component other than DVD recorder and DVD player is
set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 3 (VCR)). For
details of digital connection, see page 11.
Ì To component video output
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
7 Connecting a DBS tuner
White
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
TV
IN
Red
Å
DBS tuner
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
ı
Composite video cable (not supplied)
S-video cable (not supplied)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
Å To left/right audio channel output
ı To composite video output
Ç To S-video output
NOTE
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for a
TV is set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 2 (DBS)).
For details of digital connection, see page 11.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a TV
Connect the TV to the appropriate MONITOR OUT jacks to view the playback picture from any other connected video components.
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
Red
White
L
Stereo audio cable
White
Red
(not supplied)
Å ı
R
SUB-
WOOFER
OUT
TV
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
Î ‰
Y
PB
PR
VCR
Composite video cable
(not supplied)
IN
DVR/DVD
IN
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
S-video cable (not supplied)
COMPONENT
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel input
NOTES
ı To left/right audio channel output
Ç To composite video input
Î To S-video input
‰ To component video input
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. For details of digital connection, see page 11.
• When connecting a TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR
OUT jacks, the on-screen display does not appear on the TV
screen (see page 25).
IMPORTANT:
Audio signals come out through the MONITOR OUT (L/R) jacks
ONLY when TV Direct is in use (see page 14).
Connect these jacks to the audio input jacks corresponding to the
video connection; otherwise, no sound comes out of the TV
speaker when TV Direct is in use.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Digital output terminal
You can connect any digital components which have an optical
digital input terminal.
Digital connection
This receiver is equipped with three DIGITAL IN terminals—one
digital coaxial terminal and two digital optical terminals—and one
DIGITAL OUT terminal.
To reproduce the digital sound, use the digital connection in
addition to the analog connection methods described on pages 7
to 10.
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Digital coaxial cable (supplied: 1 cable)
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
DIGITAL OUT
PCM/
STREAM
Turn off all components before making connections.
Connecting digital recording equipment to the
DIGITAL OUT terminal enables you to perform
digital-to-digital recording.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their
manuals.
7 Digital input terminals
220V
110V
127V
NOTE
230 -
240V
The digital signal format transmitted through the DIGITAL OUT
terminal is the same as that of the input signal. For example,
when the DTS signals are input, the DTS signals are transmitted.
When the component has a digital coaxial output
terminal, connect it to the 1(DVR/DVD) terminal,
using a digital coaxial cable (supplied).
Connecting the power cord
When all the audio/video connections have been made, connect
the AC power plug to the wall outlet. Make sure that the plugs are
inserted firmly. The standby lamp lights in red.
CAUTIONS:
1(DVR/DVD)
DIGITAL IN
2(DBS)
3(VCR)
• Do not plug in before setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch
on the rear of the receiver and all connection procedures are
complete.
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not alter, twist or pull the power cord, or put anything heavy
on it, which may cause fire, electric shock, or other accidents.
• If the cord is damaged, consult a dealer and have the power
cord replaced with a new one.
When the component has a digital optical output
terminal, connect it to the 2(DBS) or 3(VCR)
terminal, using a digital optical cable (not supplied).
NOTES
• Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen
interference.
Before connecting a digital
optical cable, unplug the
protective plug.
• The preset settings such as preset channels and sound
adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases:
– When you unplug the power cord.
– When a power failure occurs.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the supplied
AC plug adaptor.
NOTES
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have
been set for use with the following components:
– 1(DVR/DVD): For DVD recorder or DVD player
– 2(DBS):
– 3(VCR):
For DBS tuner
For VCR
If you connect other components, change the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. See “Setting the digital
input (DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.
• Select the digital input mode. See “Selecting the analog or
digital input mode” on page 12.
• When you want to operate the connected component (except
DBS tuner) using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system
(see pages 40 and 41), connect them also as described on
pages 7 to 10.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the source to play
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until the source name
you want appears on the display.
Basic operations
On the front panel:
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights in
red.
• As you turn SOURCE SELECTOR, the source changes as
follows:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
The on-screen display appears on the TV screen for 5 seconds
(except “turning off the sounds temporarily”) to show the
indication in the following cases:
– When you select the source (see right column).
– When you adjust the volume (see page 13).
– When you turn off the sounds temporarily (see page 15).
– When you select the Surround/DSP modes (see page 39).
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to “SUPERIMPOSE:
OFF” (see page 25).
DVD MULTI
DVR/DVD (DGT)
DBS (DIGITAL)
VCR (DIGITAL)
TV (DIGITAL)
(Back to the beginning)
FM
AM
DVD MULTI:
Select for the DVD player using the analog
discrete output mode (5.1-channel
reproduction).
1
2
3
DVR/DVD (DGT) : Select for the DVD recorder or DVD player.
*
VCR (DIGITAL) : Select for the VCR.
*
DBS (DIGITAL) : Select for the DBS tuner.
*
Source lamps
TV (DIGITAL) :
Select for the TV.
*
FM:
AM:
Select for an FM broadcast.
Select for an AM broadcast.
1
2
From the remote control:
Press one of the source selecting buttons.
• For the tuner, press FM/AM. Each time you press FM/AM, the
band alternates between “FM” and “AM.”
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set
the mode selector to
3
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
* Selecting the analog or digital input mode
For a component you have connected using both the analog
connection and the digital connection methods (see pages 7 to 11),
you need to select the correct input mode.
• You can select the digital input only for sources which you have
selected digital input terminals for. (See “Setting the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.)
From the remote control ONLY:
Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to select the
analog or digital input mode.
1 Turn on the power
AUDIO on the
• Each time you press the button, the input mode alternates
between the analog input (“ANALOG”) and the digital input
(“DGTL AUTO”).
Press
STANDBY/ON (or
This setting is memorized for each source.
remote control).
The standby lamp goes off and the source lamp of the current
source lights in red.
DGTL AUTO:
Select for the digital input mode. The receiver
automatically detects the incoming signal
format, then the digital signal format indicator
(LPCM, DOLBY D, DTS, or DTS 96/24) for
the detected signal lights up.
Current source name appears.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
ANALOG:
Select for the analog input mode.
Initial setting: DGTL AUTO
To turn off the power (into standby)
NOTE
Press
again.
STANDBY/ON (or
AUDIO on the remote control)
When you select “DVD MULTI,” “FM,” or “AM” as the source, the
analog and digital input mode is not available.
The standby lamp lights in red.
NOTE
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn
the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust the volume
Selecting the digital decode mode
If the following symptoms occur while playing Dolby Digital or DTS
software with “DGTL AUTO” selected (see page 12), follow the
procedure below:
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or
tracks.
To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME
control clockwise (or press VOLUME + on the
remote control).
To decrease the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME
control counterclockwise (or press VOLUME – on
the remote control).
• When you adjust the volume, the volume level indication
appears on the display for a while.
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SOUND, then press DECODE to select
“DOLBY D” or “DTS.”
• Each time you press DECODE, the digital decode mode
changes as follows:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
CAUTION:
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any
sources. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of
sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin
your speakers.
DGTL AUTO
DOLBY D
(Back to the beginning)
DTS
• To play back software encoded with Dolby Digital, select
“DOLBY D.”
• To play back software encoded with DTS, select “DTS.”
NOTE
The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0”
(minimum) to “50” (maximum).
NOTES
• When you turn off the power or select another source,
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” is canceled and the digital decode mode is
automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you
intend.
Listening with headphones
You can enjoy not only stereo software but also multi-channel
software through the headphones. (Sounds are down-mixed to the
front channels while playing multi-channel software.)
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
front panel to activate the HEADPHONE mode.
The HP (headphone) indicator lights up on the display.
• You can also enjoy the Surround/DSP mode through the
headphones—3D HEADPHONE mode. For details, see pages
36 and 37.
• Disconnecting a pair of headphones from the PHONES jack
cancels the HEADPHONE (or 3D HEADPHONE) mode and
activates the speakers.
The following digital signal format indicators on the display
indicate what type of signal comes into the receiver.
LPCM:
Lights up when Linear PCM signal comes in.
DOLBY D: • Lights up when Dolby Digital signal comes in.
• Flashes when “DOLBY D” is selected for any
software other than Dolby Digital.
CAUTION:
DTS:
• Lights up when conventional DTS signal comes
in.
• Flashes when “DTS” is selected for any
software other than DTS.
Be sure to turn down the volume:
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume
can damage both the headphones and your hearing.
• Before removing headphones, as high volume may output from
the speakers.
DTS 96/24: Lights up when DTS 96/24 signal comes in.
NOTE
When “DGTL AUTO” cannot recognize the incoming signal, no
digital signal format indicator lights up on the display.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Activating TV Direct
TV Direct enables you to use this receiver as an AV selector
while the receiver is turned off.
When TV Direct is activated, the pictures and sounds go from the
video components such as DVD player to the TV through this
receiver. Thus, you can use the video components and the TV as
if they were connected directly.
• This function takes effect for the following sources—DVR/DVD,
VCR, and DBS.
To activate (or deactivate) TV Direct, follow the procedure below:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set
the mode selector to
1 Press TV DIRECT.
All the indications disappear, then the source lamp of the
current source lights in green.
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
2 Turn on the video component and TV.
3 Select the target video component.
On the front panel:
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until one of the
source lamps—DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS—lights
in green.
From the remote control:
Press one of the source selecting buttons—
DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS.
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights
in green.
Adjusting the subwoofer audio
position
If the subwoofer sound is much reinforced for stereo sound
compared to the sound reproduced with multi-channel, set the
subwoofer audio position. The subwoofer output level is
automatically decreased by the selected value when you are
listening in stereo.
To cancel TV Direct and turn off the receiver, press
STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or
control).
AUDIO on the remote
The receiver is turned off and the standby lamp lights up.
The AUDIO P. indicator lights up when this function is activated.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
To cancel TV Direct and turn on the receiver, press TV DIRECT
again.
The receiver is turned on and the source lamp currently selected
lights in red.
From the remote control ONLY:
NOTES
Press SOUND, then press A.POSITION repeatedly.
• When TV Direct is activated, you cannot enjoy any of the sound
effects the receiver produces, and cannot use the speakers
connected to the receiver.
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI,” “FM,” or “AM” is
selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected
source—“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” or “DBS.”
• Each time you press A.POSITION, the subwoofer audio position
level changes as follows:
AUDIO P. indicator
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
–2
–4
–6
OFF (canceled)
The smaller the number becomes, the more the level decreases
automatically when listening in stereo.
• If no adjustment is required, select “OFF” (initial setting).
NOTES
• The minimum subwoofer output level is –10 dB.
Ex.: When setting the subwoofer output level to “–8 (dB)” and
the subwoofer audio position to “–4 (dB),” the subwoofer
output level when listening in stereo will be –10 dB.
To adjust the subwoofer output level, see page 29.
• This function is not available when the Surround/DSP mode is
activated or “DVD MULTI” is selected.
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you
intend.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel the Sleep Timer:
Press SLEEP repeatedly so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the
display. (The SLEEP indicator goes off.)
• The Sleep Timer is also canceled when:
– You turn off the receiver, or
Turning off the sounds temporarily
From the remote control ONLY:
– TV Direct is activated.
Press MUTING to turn off the sound through all
connected speakers and headphones.
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off.
Basic adjustment of auto memory
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source:
• when you turn off the power, and
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
• when you change the source.
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the
newly selected source are automatically recalled.
The following can be stored for each source:
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 12)
• Subwoofer audio position (see page 14)
• Midnight mode (see page 24)
• Speaker output level (see page 29)
• Digital equalization pattern (see page 30)
• Bass boost (see page 30)
• Pressing VOLUME +/– (or turning MASTER VOLUME control
on the front panel) also restores the sound.
Changing the display brightness
You can dim the display—Dimmer.
• Subwoofer phase (see page 30)
• Input attenuator mode (see page 30)
• Surround/DSP mode selection (see page 39)
From the remote control ONLY:
Press DIMMER repeatedly.
• Each time you press the button, the display brightness changes
as follows:
NOTE
If the source is “FM” or “AM,” you can assign a different setting
for each band.
DIMMER 1:
Dims the display slightly.
Dims the blue illumination slightly.
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.
Dims the blue illumination slightly (more than
DIMMER 1).
DIMMER 2:
Signal and speaker indicators on the display
Signal indicators
Speaker indicators
DIMMER 3:
Turns off the display and blue illumination.
(Temporarily canceled when you operate the
receiver.*)
L
C
R
L
C
R
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P.
DIMMER OFF: Cancels the Dimmer (normal display).
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO :
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
x
S.WFRLFE
OLBY D
DTS
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
* Except when activating or deactivating TV Direct.
LS SB RS
The signal indicators light up as follows:
Turning off the power with the Sleep
Timer
L:
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the
left channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the
right channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.
You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer.
R:
C:
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SLEEP repeatedly.
• Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes in 10
minute intervals. The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display.
LS*: Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes
in.
RS*: Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes
SLEEP indicator
in.
SB: Lights up when the surround back channel signal
comes in.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
LFE: Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
* When monaural surround signal comes in, only “S” lights up.
10
20
30
40
90
50
80
60
NOTE
When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, all the signal
indicators except “SB” light up.
OFF (canceled)
70
When the shut-off time comes:
The receiver turns off automatically.
The speaker indicators light up as follows:
S . WFR
• The subwoofer indicator (
) lights up when
“SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER:YES.” For details,
see page 21.
• The other speaker indicators light up only when the
corresponding speaker is set to “SMALL” or “LARGE,” and
also when required for the current playback.
To check or change the remaining time until the shut-off
time:
Press SLEEP once.
The remaining time (in minutes) until the shut-off time appears.
• To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the remote control ONLY:
Basic settings
When operating the receiver using the remote control,
set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
To obtain the best possible sound effect from Surround/DSP
modes (see pages 34 to 39), you need to set up the speaker and
subwoofer information after all the connections are completed.
From pages 16 to 25, how to set speakers and other basic items
of the receiver are explained.
1
Take your position where you listen to the
sound.
• Make sure speaker cables are connected firmly.
Setting the speaker information
automatically—Smart Surround Setup
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect
from the Surround/DSP modes.
By using Smart Surround Setup, the following are automatically
calculated by one simple action—clapping hands.
• Speaker distance (compared to that of the closest speaker)
• Speaker output level (except the subwoofer)
NOTES
2 Press and hold SMART SURROUND SETUP
• Before starting Smart Surround Setup, set the speaker
information correctly (SMALL, LARGE, or NO) according to your
speakers except the subwoofer (see page 21).
• The speakers which are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see
page 21) are not indicated clearly on the TV screen.
• When the setting is made by Smart Surround Setup, the
speaker distance and output level you have set before will be
inactive.
until “SETTING UP” flashes.
*1
*2
*3
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L
C
R
• You can see the setting process on the TV screen and the
display during Smart Surround Setup. If you have turned off the
display, cancel the Dimmer (see page 15); otherwise, you
cannot see the information on the display.
SETTING UP
SB
LS
RS
*6
*4
• Smart Surround Setup will not be done correctly if you or other
object blocks the sound.
• When you change your speakers, do the following procedure
again.
*5
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
L: Left front speaker
C: Center speaker
R: Right front speaker
RS: Right surround speaker
SB: Surround back speaker
LS: Left surround speaker
In this section, the on-screen display on the TV screen is used
for explaining.
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen
when connecting the TV through the COMPONENT
MONITOR OUT jacks (see page 10).
3 When “CLAPYOUR HANDS.” appears, clap
your hands over your head once while the
indications still remain.
• On the display, “SETTING UP” stops flashing.
The receiver starts detecting the level of the sound coming
through each speaker (except the subwoofer).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your clapping sound is detected successfully,
When your clapping sound is not detected correctly,
• On the TV screen, “SUCCESSFUL,” “RESULT,” and the setting
“SETTING UP” appears again after one of the following
values appear. The setting values are shown for about 12
messages. In this case, repeat step 3.
seconds.
Ex.:
SILENT:
• The receiver detects sound from only the left
and right front speakers.
• The receiver detects no sound from the front
speakers and detects sound from at least one of
other speakers.
*7
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L+2
C 0 R+2
STD+0.3m
SILENT-ALL: The receiver cannot detect any sound from any
+0.3m
speaker for about 10 seconds.
AGAIN:
• The receiver cannot detect sound from the left
or right front speaker.
• The receiver fails to calculate the speakers'
output level and difference of each speaker's
position in distance.
LS+6 SUCCESSFUL RS+6
+1.2m
RESULT
+1.2m
*8
*9
SB+4
+0.6m
In the following cases, set the speakers manually.
• On the display, “SUCCESSFUL” appears, then the setting
values are shown as follows for about 12 seconds:
Ex.:
• When “SILENT” appears twice in succession.
The setting is partially made. (The distance of the speakers
from which sound has not been detected is set to “+9.0m
(+30ft).”)
*7
The receiver exits from Smart Surround Setup.
• When “MANUAL” appears.
The receiver fails to detect the sound three times. The receiver
exits from Smart Surround Setup.
*8
*9
To cancel Smart Surround Setup, press SMART SURROUND
SETUP while “SETTING UP” flashes.
• No other operations can be accepted after “SETTING UP” stops
flashing. Complete the Smart Surround Setup.
R
LS
L
RS
C
SB
To check the current setting made by Smart Surround Setup,
press SMART SURROUND SETUP while the receiver is in
normal operation mode.
*7
Standard channel (the closest speaker).
This speaker position now works as the reference
position (“0m/ft”) and other speakers’ distance is
shown by the difference with this reference speaker
position.
The setting values appear. On the display, the setting values are
shown one after another.
• The current setting is not indicated but “MANUAL” appears if you
change the following settings after using Smart Surround Setup:
– If you change speaker distance manually.
*8
*9
Difference of each speaker position in distance (in
meters or feet).
Each speaker’s output level (–6 to +6).
– If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO.”
To check the current setting, see each setting item of the
speaker distance (see page 22) and the speaker output level
(see page 29).
When finishing to show the setting values,
• If you have not used Smart Surround Setup, “NO S.S.S.”
appears.
On the TV screen, “COMPLETED” appears, then “TEST TONE”
and “END” appear. On the display, “TEST? END?” appears.
• To adjust the speakers’ output levels manually, press TEST
TONE (see page 29).
• To disappear the on-screen display, press SET or any button
except TEST TONE.
• The receiver returns to normal operation mode automatically if
no operations are done for about 10 seconds.
Ex.:
NOTES
• The speaker distance and output level manually set will be
applied instead of those set by using Smart Surround Setup in
the following cases:
– When you change one of the speaker distance (see page 22).
– When you change one of the speaker size either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO”
(see page 21).
• When you want to adjust the speaker distance and output level
manually, see pages 22 and 29.
• When the headphone is in use or “DVD MULTI” is selected as
the source, the receiver returns to normal operation mode
without showing “TEST TONE.”
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L+2
+0.3m
C 0 R+2
STD+0.3m
LS+6
+1.2m
TEST TONE RS+6
END
+1.2m
SB+4
+0.9m
• Do not clap your hands so hard that it may hurt your hands.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic setting items
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.
• You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.
Items and to do
SUBWOOFER (SUBWOOFER)
DUAL MONO (DUAL MONO)
Register your subwoofer. (21)
Select the Dual Mono sound channel. (23)
FRONT SPK (FRONT SPK)
SUBWFR OUT (SUBWFR OUT)
Register your front speaker size. (21)
Select sounds emitted from the subwoofer. (23)
CENTER SPK (CENTER SPK)
CROSSOVER (CROSSOVER)
Register your center speaker size. (21)
Select the cutoff frequency to the subwoofer. (23)
SURR. SPK (SURRND SPK)
LFE ATT (LFE ATT)
Register your surround speaker size. (21)
Attenuate the bass (LFE) sounds. (23)
SURR. BACK SPK (S BACK SPK)
MIDNIGHT (MIDNIGHT)
Register your surround back speaker size. (21)
Reproduce a powerful sound at night. (24)
DISTANCE UNIT (DIST UNIT)
DIGITAL IN 1 (DIGITAL IN1)
Select the measuring unit for the speaker distance. (22)
Select the component connected to the digital coaxial
terminal—1(DVR/DVD). (24)
FL SPK DISTANCE (FRNT L DIST)*
Register the distance from the left front speaker to your
listening point. (22)
DIGITAL IN 2 (DIGITAL IN2)
Select the component connected to the digital optical
terminal—2(VIDEO). (24)
FR SPK DISTANCE (FRNT R DIST)*
Register the distance from the right front speaker to your
listening point. (22)
DIGITAL IN 3 (DIGITAL IN3)
Select the component connected to the digital optical
terminal—3(TV). (24)
C SPK DISTANCE (CENTER DIST)*
Register the distance from the center speaker to your listening DVD VIDEO (DVD VIDEO)
point. (22)
Select the type of video terminal used for the DVD recorder or
DVD player. (25)
LS SPK DISTANCE (SURR L DIST)*
Register the distance from the left surround speaker to your
listening point. (22)
VCR VIDEO (VCR VIDEO)
Select the type of video terminal used for the VCR. (25)
RS SPK DISTANCE (SURR R DIST)*
Register the distance from the right surround speaker to your
listening point. (22)
SUPERIMPOSE (SUPERIMPOSE)
Select to superimpose the menus on the TV screen. (25)
DOWN MIX (DOWN MIX)
SB SPK DISTANCE (S BACK DIST)*
Register the distance from the surround back speaker to your
listening point. (22)
Select to convert S-video signals into composite video signals.
(25)
Y/C SEPARATE (Y/C SEP.)
EX/ES/PLIIx (EX/ES/PLIIx)
Select to convert composite video signals into S-video signals.
(25)
Select the EX/ES/PLIIx reproduction mode. (22)
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.
Operation through on-screen display menus
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.
Menu operation buttons
From the remote control:
On the front panel:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control,
set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Button / JOG
To do
SETTING button show setting item previously selected.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous SETTING MENU.
Button
To do
MULTI JOG
• select a menu or an item.
• change a setting.
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”
5 / ∞ buttons select a menu or an item.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous SETTING MENU.
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu configuration
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)
TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (5)
SETTING MENU (1)
TOP MENU
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
SETTING MENU (1)
SUBWOOFER
5
SUBWOOFER
FRONT SPK
CENTER SPK
SURR. SPK
:
NO
: LARGE
: SMALL
: SMALL
FRONT SPEAKER
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL
∞
CENTER SPEAKER
:ENTER
:EXIT
SURROUND SPEAKER
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (2)
SETTING MENU (2)
DISTANCE UNIT
5
DISTANCE UNIT
:meter
FL SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
FR SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
C SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
LS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
RS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
SB SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
∞
FL SPK DISTANCE
FR SPK DISTANCE
CENTER SPK DISTANCE
LS SPK DISTANCE
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
RS SPK DISTANCE
SB SPK DISTANCE
SETTING MENU (3)
SETTING MENU (3)
5
EX/ES/PL x
DUAL MONO
EX/ES/PL x :
DUAL MONO :
SUBWFR OUT :
CROSSOVER :
AUTO
MAIN
150Hz
0dB
LFE ATT
MIDNIGHT
∞
:
:
SUBWOOFER OUT
CROSSOVER
OFF
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
LFE ATT
MIDNIGHT MODE
SETTING MENU (4)
SETTING MENU (4)
DIGITAL IN 1
DIGITAL IN 2
DIGITAL IN 3
DVD VIDEO INPUT
VCR VIDEO INPUT
5
DIGITAL IN 1: DVR/DVD
DIGITAL IN 2:
DIGITAL IN 3:
DBS
VCR
S/C
S/C
DVD VIDEO
VCR VIDEO
∞
:
:
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (5)
SETTING MENU (5)
SUPERIMPOSE
DOWN MIX
5
SUPERIMPOSE :
ON
OFF
OFF
DOWN MIX
:
Y/C SEPARATE:
∞
Y/C SEPARATE
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (1)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu operating procedure
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.
Ex.:When setting DIGITAL IN 1 terminal.
Operations
On the TV screen
On the display
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
1 To show “TOP MENU,” press MENU.
x
ATT
TOP MENU
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
“SETTING” appears.
:ENTER
:EXIT
“TOP MENU” appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
2 To select “SETTING MENU,” press SET.
x
ATT
SETTING MENU (1)
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SUBWOOFER
FRONT SPK
CENTER SPK
SURR. SPK
:
NO
: LARGE
: SMALL
: SMALL
The submenu previously
selected appears.
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
The setting item previously selected
appears.
3 To select the desired submenu, press
5 or ∞ repeatedly.
There are five screens from “SETTING MENU (1)”
to “SETTING MENU (5).” To change the screen,
simply pressing 5 or ∞ repeatedly.You can go to
the next/previous screen.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
Button indications on the screen
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.
TOP MENU
DIGITAL IN 1
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
:ENTER
:EXIT
23:OPERATE
:BACK
Usable buttons and their functions
Usable buttons and their functions
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
x
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
4 Press SET.
DIGITAL IN 1
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
The current setting of the
selected item appears.
23:OPERATE
:BACK
The selected submenu appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
5 To select the appropriate setting, press
2 or 3 repeatedly, then press SET.
x
ATT
DIGITAL IN 1
HP
MHz
kHz
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
The on-screen display returns to the previous
SETTING MENU. In this example, “SETTING MENU
(4)” appears on the TV screen and “DIGITAL IN1”
appears on the display.
DVR/DVD
TV
DBS
VCR
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press
SET.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items
if necessary.
NOTES
• To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.
• To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press SETTING
when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.
• The setting item previously selected can be shown on the TV screen by pressing SETTING on the front panel when the receiver is in
normal operation mode.
Setting the items
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications on the display, the indications are slightly different from what is shown
on the on-screen display.
This is because of the limited number of characters shown on the display.
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER:YES” is shown as “SUBWFR:YES” on the display.
• “MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF” is shown as “NIGHT: OFF” on the display.
7 Setting the speaker size—FRONT SPEAKER,
CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND SPEAKER,
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER
Setting the speakers
7 Setting subwoofer information—SUBWOOFER
Each time the receiver turns on, the receiver detects the
subwoofer connection and automatically changes the setting of
the subwoofer.
When you want to change the setting manually, select either one
below.
Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.
LARGE
SMALL
NO
Select when the cone speaker size is larger than
12 cm.
Select when the cone speaker size is smaller than
12 cm.
SUBWOOFER:YES
Select when you have connected a subwoofer.
Select when you have disconnected a speaker.
(Not selectable for the front speakers.)
S . WFR
The subwoofer indicator (
) lights up on the display.You
can adjust the subwoofer output level (see page 29).
SUBWOOFER: NO
Initial setting: SMALL for all speakers*
Select when you have disconnected a subwoofer. Selecting
this changes the front speaker size to “LARGE” (see right
column).
* When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO,” the front
speaker size is fixed to “LARGE” (and you cannot select
“SMALL”).
NOTES
NOTE
• If you have selected “SMALL” for the front speaker size, you
cannot select “LARGE” for other speakers.
You need to change the setting each time you turn on the receiver
if you want to change the subwoofer information set automatically.
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
SMALL,” you cannot select “LARGE” for the surround back
speaker.
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
NO,” the surround back speaker is fixed to “NO.”
• If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO,” the
distance manually set will be applied instead of those set by
using Smart Surround Setup.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Setting the speaker distance
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting
—EX/ES/PLIIx
Depending on this setting, available Surround modes for digital
multi-channel software vary—EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel)
reproduction or 5.1-channel reproduction. Select an appropriate
setting for your enjoyment.
• For details about relation between EX/ES/PLIIx setting and
available Surround mode, see page 38.
• To activate the Surround mode, see page 39.
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect
from the Surround/DSP modes.
By referring to the speaker distance, the receiver automatically
sets the delay time of the sound through each speaker so that
sounds through all the speakers can reach you at the same time.
• If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17,
this setting is not required.
7 Measuring unit—DISTANCE UNIT
Select which measuring unit you use.
EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO
According to the incoming signal, an appropriate Surround
mode is applied.
DISTANCE UNIT: meter Select to set the distance in meters.
DISTANCE UNIT: feet
Select to set the distance in feet.
• For Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS-ES software, 6.1-
channel reproduction is applied*.
• For other multi-channel (more than 4 channel) encoded
software, 5.1-channel reproduction is applied.
Initial setting: DISTANCE UNIT: meter
7 Speaker distance—
EX/ES/PLIIx: ON
FL SPK DISTANCE (for the left front speaker),
FR SPK DISTANCE (for the right front speaker),
CENTER SPK DISTANCE (for the center speaker),
LS SPK DISTANCE (for the left surround speaker),
RS SPK DISTANCE (for the right surround speaker),
SB SPK DISTANCE (for the surround back speaker)
Select to apply 6.1-channel reproduction to both 5.1-channel
and 6.1-channel encoded software.
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MOVIE
Select to apply “PLIIx MOVIE” (6.1-channel) reproduction to
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.
Adjustable range: 0.3 m to 9.0 m in 0.3 m intervals
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MUSIC
(1 ft to 30 ft in 1 ft intervals)
Select to apply “PLIIx MUSIC” (6.1-channel) reproduction to
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10 ft) for all speakers
EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF
Select to cancel the EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.
C
R
L
Initial setting: EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO
3.3 m
(11 ft)
3.0 m
(10 ft)
2.7 m
(9 ft)
* For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-
channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied even though
you have selected “EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO.” In this case, select
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”
2.4 m
(8 ft)
From the remote control
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
2.1 m
(7 ft)
LS
RS
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Press EX/ES repeatedly to select an
appropriate setting for your
enjoyment.
SB
In this case, set the distance as follows:
Left front speaker (L):
Right front speaker (R):
Center speaker (C):
“FRONT L: 3.0m (10ft)”
“FRONT R: 3.0m (10ft)”
“CENTER: 3.0m (10ft)”
Left surround speaker (LS): “SURROUND L: 2.7m (9ft)”
Right surround speaker (RS): “SURROUND R: 2.7m (9ft)”
Surround back speaker (SB): “SURROUND BACK: 2.4m (8ft)”
NOTES
NOTES
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
NO” (see page 21).
• You cannot set the speaker distance for the speakers you have
set to “NO.”
– When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source.
• When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK
SPK: NO” (see page 21), the Virtual Surround Back (see page
38) is applied to EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.
• If you change one of these settings manually, the distance
manually set will be applied instead of those set by using Smart
Surround Setup.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the main or sub channel
—DUAL MONO
You can select the playback sound (channel) you want while
playing digital software recorded (or broadcasted) in Dual Mono
mode (see page 36), which includes two monaural channels
separately.
Setting bass sound
7 Setting subwoofer output—SUBWOOFER OUT
You can select the type of the signal which can be transmitted
through the subwoofer. In other words, you can determine
whether or not the bass elements of the front speaker channels
are transmitted through the subwoofer regardless of the front
speaker size setting (either “SMALL” or “LARGE”).
DUAL MONO: MAIN
Select to play back the main channel (Ch 1).*
Signal indicator “L” lights up while playing back this channel.
SUBWFR OUT: LFE
Select to emit only the LFE signals (while playing Dolby
Digital and DTS software) or the bass elements of the
“SMALL” front speakers (while playing any source other than
above).
DUAL MONO: SUB
Select to play back the sub-channel (Ch 2).*
Signal indicator “R” lights up while playing back this channel.
SUBWFR OUT: LFE+MAIN
DUAL MONO: ALL
Select to always emit the bass elements of the front speaker
channels (MAIN). While playing Dolby Digital and DTS
software, the bass elements and the LFE signals are both
emitted.
Select to play back both the main and sub-channels (Ch 1/Ch 2).*
Signal indicators “L” and “R” light up while playing back these
channels.
Initial setting: DUAL MONO: MAIN
Initial setting: SUBWFR OUT: LFE
* Dual Mono signals can be heard from the following speakers—L
(left front speaker), R (right front speaker), and C (center
speaker), with respect to the current Surround setting:
NOTE
When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO” (see page
21), this function is not available.
With Surround Activated
Without
Surround
Center speaker setting
Dual Mono
setting
SMALL/LARGE
NO
7 Setting the crossover frequency—CROSSOVER
L
R
L
C
Ch 1
R
L
R
Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sounds efficiently. If
you use a small speaker in any position, this receiver
automatically reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to
the small speaker to the large speakers.
MAIN
SUB
ALL
Ch 1 Ch 1
Ch 2 Ch 2
Ch 1 Ch 2
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch1
Ch 2
Ch 2
Ch 1+Ch 2
Ch 1+Ch 2 Ch 1+Ch 2
To use this function properly, set this crossover frequency level
according to the size of the small speaker connected.
• If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 21),
this function will not take effect (“CROSSOVER: OFF” appears).
NOTE
The Dual Mono format is not identical with bilingual broadcasting
for TV programs. So this setting does not take effect while
watching such bilingual programs.
CROSSOVER: 80Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 12 cm.
CROSSOVER: 100Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 10 cm.
CROSSOVER: 120Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 8 cm.
CROSSOVER: 150Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 6 cm.
CROSSOVER: 200Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is less than 5 cm.
Initial setting: CROSSOVER: 150Hz
NOTE
Crossover frequency is not valid for the HEADPHONE and 3D
HEADPHONE modes.
7 Setting the low frequency effect attenuator
—LFE ATT
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, set the LFE level to eliminate
distortion.
• This function takes effect only when the LFE signals come in.
LFE ATT: 0dB
Normally select this.
LFE ATT: –10dB Select when the bass sound is distorted.
Initial setting: LFE ATT: 0dB
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Midnight mode
—MIDNIGHT MODE
You can enjoy a powerful sound at night using the Midnight mode.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN)
terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3
When you use the digital input terminals, register what
components are connected to which terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3
(see page 11) so that the correct source name will appear when
you select the digital source.
Select one of the following components for each terminal:
MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF
Select when you want to enjoy surround with its full dynamic
range. (No effect applied.)
DVR/DVD For the DVD player (or DVD recorder).
MIDNIGHT MODE: 1
DBS
VCR
TV
For the DBS tuner.
For the VCR.
For the TV.
Select when you want to reduce the dynamic range a little.
MIDNIGHT MODE: 2
Select when you want to apply the compression effect fully
(useful at night).
Initial setting: DVR/DVD (for “DIGITAL IN 1”)
DBS (for “DIGITAL IN 2”)
Initial setting: MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF
VCR (for “DIGITAL IN 3”)
From the remote control
NOTES
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
• You cannot assign the same component for different terminals.
The priority order for assignment is as follows:
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
“DIGITAL IN 1” > “DIGITAL IN 2” > “DIGITAL IN 3.”
“DIGITAL IN 1” can be set to any component.
Press SOUND, then press MIDNIGHT
repeatedly to select either one of the
above.
Ex.: When “DIGITAL IN 1” is set to “TV.”
DIGITAL IN 1:
TV
NOTE
“DVR/DVD,” “DBS,” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL
IN 2.”
And when “DIGITAL IN 2” is set to “DVR/DVD.”
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
DIGITAL IN 1:
DIGITAL IN 2:
TV
DVR/DVD
“DBS” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL IN 3.”
• Setting “DIGITAL IN 1” affects “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN
3” settings. When you have changed “DIGITAL IN 1,” confirm the
components assigned to “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN 3.”
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the component video input
mode—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO
INPUT
When you use the component video inputs for connecting the
DVD recorder (or DVD player) or VCR, register the type of video
input jacks.
Converting S-video signals into composite
video signals—DOWN MIX
You can select whether or not to convert S-video signals into
composite video signals.
DOWN MIX: ON Select to convert S-video signals into
composite video signals.
If you have not selected appropriate video input jacks, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly (see page 40).
DOWN MIX: OFF Select not to use this function.
Initial setting: DOWN MIX: OFF
For the DVD recorder or DVD player (DVD VIDEO):
NOTES
DVD VIDEO: S/C
• This function is available when satisfying all the following
requirements:
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to
the composite video or S-video input jacks.
– When a video component is connected to this receiver
through at least one of the S-video input terminals.
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this
receiver through at least one of the composite video output
jacks.
DVD VIDEO: COMPONENT
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to
the component video input jacks.
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to
“S/C” (see left column).
Initial setting: DVD VIDEO: S/C
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)
For the VCR (VCR VIDEO):
VCR VIDEO: S/C
Select when connecting the VCR to the composite video or S- Converting composite video signals into S-
video input jacks.
video signals—Y/C SEPARATE
VCR VIDEO: COMPONENT
You can select whether or not to convert composite video signals
Select when connecting the VCR to the component video
come from a video component into S-video signals.
input jacks.
Y/C SEPARATE: ON
Select to convert composite video signals
into S-video signals.
Initial setting: VCR VIDEO: S/C
Y/C SEPARATE: OFF Select not to use this function.
Superimposing the menus
—SUPERIMPOSE
You can select whether or not to superimpose the on-screen
display on the TV screen.
Initial setting: Y/C SEPARATE: OFF
NOTES
• This function is available when satisfying all the following
requirements:
SUPERIMPOSE: ON
– When a video component is connected to this receiver
through at least one of the composite video input jacks.
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this
receiver through at least one of the S-video output terminals.
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to
“S/C” (see left column).
Select to superimpose the on-screen display on the TV
screen.
SUPERIMPOSE: OFF
Select to cancel superimposition. The on-screen display will
be shown on the blue background screen.
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)
Initial setting: SUPERIMPOSE: ON
NOTES
• Some on-screen displays appear on the TV screen regardless
of this setting.
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen when
connecting the TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
jacks (see page 10).
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound adjustments
You can make sound adjustment to your preference after
completing basic setting.
Basic adjustment items
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.
• You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.
Items and to do
SUBWOOFER LEVEL (SUBWFR LVL)
BASS BOOST (BASS BOOST)
Adjust the subwoofer output level. (29)
Boost the bass level. (30)
FRONT L LEVEL (FRONT L LVL)
SUBWFR PHASE (SBWFR PHASE)
Adjust the left front speaker output level. (29)
Select the subwoofer sound phase. (30)
FRONT R LEVEL (FRONT R LVL)
INPUT ATT (INPUT ATT)
Adjust the right front speaker output level. (29)
Attenuate the input level of analog source. (30)
CENTER LEVEL (CENTER LVL)
EFFECT (EFFECT)
Adjust the center speaker output level. (29)
Adjust the effect level. (31)
SURR. L LEVEL (SURR L LVL)
PANORAMA (PANORAMA)
Adjust the left surround speaker output level. (29)
Add wraparound sound effect with side-wall image. (31)
SURR. R LEVEL (SURR R LVL)
CENTER GAIN (CENTER GAIN)
Adjust the right surround speaker output level. (29)
Adjust the sound localization of the center channel. (31)
SURR. BACK LEVEL (S BACK LVL)
CENTER TONE (CENTER TONE)
Adjust the surround back speaker output level. (29)
Make the center tone soft or sharp. (31)
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz (D EQ 63Hz)*
CNTR ALIGNMENT (CNTR ALIGN)
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz (D EQ 250Hz)*
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz (D EQ 1kHz)*
Align the vertical localization of the center channel. (31)
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz (D EQ 4kHz)*
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz (D EQ 16kHz)*
Adjust the equalization pattern of each band. (30)
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.
Operation through on-screen display menus
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.
Menu operation buttons
On the front panel:
From the remote control:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control,
set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Button / JOG
To do
ADJUST button show adjustment item previously selected.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous ADJUST MENU.
Button
To do
MULTI JOG
• select a menu or an item.
• change a setting.
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”
5 / ∞ buttons select a menu or an item.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous ADJUST MENU.
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu configuration
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)
• The “ADJUST MENU (3)” screen cannot be shown depending on the current settings and the connections.
ADJUST MENU (3)
TOP MENU
TOP MENU
ADJUST MENU (1)
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
ADJUST MENU (1)
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
FRONT L LEVEL
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
SURR. L LEVEL
SURR. R LEVEL
:
:
:
:
:
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
:ENTER
:EXIT
SURR. BACK LEVEL :
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SURROUND L LEVEL
SURROUND R LEVEL
SURROUND BACK LEVEL
ADJUST MENU (2)
ADJUST MENU (2)
5
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz
BASS BOOST
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz :
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz :
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz :
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz :
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz :
0
0
0
0
0
BASS BOOST
∞
: OFF
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
ADJUST MENU (3)
ADJUST MENU (3)
SUBWOOFER PHASE
INPUT ATT
EFFECT
5
SUBWFR PHASE : NORMAL
INPUT ATT
EFFECT
: NORMAL
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
0.3
3
PANORAMA
CENTER GAIN
CENTER TONE
CNTR ALIGNMENT:
OFF
∞
PANORAMA
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
CENTER GAIN
CENTER TONE
CENTER ALIGNMENT
ADJUST MENU (1)
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu operating procedure
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.
Ex.:When adjusting subwoofer output level.
Operations
On the TV screen
On the display
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
1 To show “TOP MENU,” press MENU.
Then press 5 or ∞ to select “ADJUST
MENU.”
x
ATT
TOP MENU
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
“SETTING” appears.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
:ENTER
:EXIT
“TOP MENU” appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
2 To select “ADJUST MENU,” press SET.
x
ATT
ADJUST MENU (1)
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
SURR. L LEVEL
SURR. R LEVEL
:
:
:
:
:
The submenu previously
selected appears.
SURR. BACK LEVEL :
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
The adjustment item previously selected
appears.
3 To select the desired submenu, press
5 or ∞ repeatedly.
There are three screens from “ADJUST MENU (1)”
to “ADJUST MENU (3).” To change the screen,
simply pressing 5 or ∞ repeatedly.You can go to
the next/previous screen.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
4 Press SET.
x
ATT
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
HP
MHz
kHz
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
The current setting of the
selected item appears.
23:OPERATE
:BACK
The selected submenu appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
5 To adjust the selected item, press 2 or
3 repeatedly, then press SET.
x
ATT
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
HP
MHz
kHz
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
The on-screen display returns to the previous
ADJUST MENU. In this example, “ADJUST MENU
(1)” appears on the TV screen and “SUBWFR LVL”
appears on the display.
–10
0
+10
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press
SET.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items
if necessary.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
• To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.
• To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote
control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press
ADJUST when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.
• The adjustment item previously selected can be shown on the
TV screen by pressing ADJUST on the front panel when the
receiver is in normal operation mode.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
2
1, 3
Button indications on the screen
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV
screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.
1
Press TEST TONE to check the speakers’ output
balance.
TOP MENU
• On the TV screen, “TEST TONE” appears. The
indicator corresponding to the speaker appears while a
test tone comes out of the speakers.
EX.:
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
TEST TONE
SW+1 L+5 C 0 R-3
:ENTER
:EXIT
LS+5
RS+5
Usable buttons and their functions
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
SB+5
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
• On the display, “TEST L” starts flashing, and a test tone
comes out of the speakers in the following order:
23:OPERATE
:BACK
Usable buttons and their functions
C
R
L
SW
LS
Adjusting the items
RS
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications
on the display, the indications are slightly different from what
is shown on the on-screen display.
This is because of the limited number of characters shown
on the display.
SB
2
Adjust the speaker output levels.
To adjust the left front speaker level (L), press
FRONT L +/–.
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER: +10” is shown as “SUBWFR +10” on
the display.
To adjust the right front speaker level (R), press
FRONT R +/–.
• “BASS BOOST: ON” is shown as “B BOOST ON” on
the display.
To adjust the center speaker level (C), press
CENTER +/–.
To adjust the left surround speaker level (LS), press
SURR L +/–.
Adjusting speaker output level
• SUBWOOFER LEVEL (subwoofer output level),
• FRONT L LEVEL (left front speaker output level),
• FRONT R LEVEL (right front speaker output level),
• CENTER LEVEL (center speaker output level),
• SURROUND L LEVEL (left surround speaker output level),
• SURROUND R LEVEL (right surround speaker output level),
• SURROUND BACK LEVEL (surround back speaker output
level)
To adjust the right surround speaker level (RS), press
SURR R +/–.
To adjust the surround back speaker level (SB), press
S.BACK +/–.
To adjust the subwoofer level (SW), press SUBWFR +/–.
3
Press TEST TONE again to stop the test tone.
You can adjust the speaker output levels.
Adjust all the speakers’ output levels so that you can listen to the
sounds from all the speakers at the same level.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
NOTES
• You can adjust the speaker output levels without the test tone.
• No test tone comes out of the speakers and no speaker
indication appears on the TV screen corresponding to the
speaker which is set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see
page 21).
Adjustable range: –10 (dB) to +10 (dB) (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all speakers
• No test tone is available when the headphone is in use or
“DVD MULTI” is selected.
NOTES
• If you have selected “NO” for a speaker (see page 21), the
output level for the corresponding speaker is not adjustable.
• While using the headphones, you can adjust only the left and
right front speakers’ output level.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the equalization patterns
Adjusting the bass sounds
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz
You can adjust equalization patterns in five frequency bands
(center frequency: 63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz) for the
front speakers.
7 Reinforcing the bass—BASS BOOST
You can boost the bass level—Bass Boost.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
BASS BOOST: ON Select to boost the bass level.
The BASS indicator lights up on the display.
Adjustable range: –8 (dB) to +8 (dB) (in 2 dB intervals)
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all bands
BASS BOOST: OFF Select to deactivate the Bass Boost.
• When adjustment is made, the EQ indicator lights up on the
display.
Initial setting: BASS BOOST: OFF
NOTE
If no adjustment is required, set all the frequency bands to
“0 (dB).”
This function affects only the sound coming out through the front
speakers.
• The EQ indicator goes off from the display.
From the remote control:
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
Before you start, remember...
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
Press SOUND, then press BASS
BOOST repeatedly.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
• Each time you press BASS BOOST, the
Bass Boost turns on and off alternately.
1
2
Press SOUND.
Press EQ FREQ repeatedly to
select the band you want to adjust.
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
3
4
Press EQ LEVEL 9/( to adjust
the equalization pattern of the
selected band.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust
other bands.
2
3
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
1
7 Selecting the subwoofer sound phase—
SUBWOOFER PHASE
You can change the subwoofer sound phase to your preference.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
PHASE: NORMAL
Normally select this.
PHASE: REVERSE Select this when you feel the bass sound is
better with this mode rather than with
“PHASE: NORMAL.”
Initial setting: PHASE: NORMAL
NOTE
This function takes effect only when “SUBWOOFER” is set to
“SUBWOOFER:YES” (see page 21).
7 Attenuating the input signal—INPUT ATT
When the input level of analog source is too high, the sound will
be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
INPUT ATT: ON
Select to attenuate the input signal level.
The ATT indicator lights up on the display.
INPUT ATT: NORMAL Select to deactivate attenuation.
Initial setting: INPUT ATT: NORMAL
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Making the center tone soft or sharp
Adjusting the sound parameters for the
Surround/DSP modes
You can adjust the Surround/DSP sound parameters to your
preference.
—CENTER TONE
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes is
in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.
• This setting is common to all Surround modes, and is
memorized separately for DSP modes.
• For details about the Surround/DSP modes, see pages 34 to 39.
• You cannot adjust the center tone in the following cases:
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21).
– When Dual Mono software is played back.
– While listening with the headphones.
7 Adjusting the effect level for DSP modes
—EFFECT
This setting is available only when one of the DSP modes (except
ALL CH ST) is in use. To activate DSP mode, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
DSP mode.
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: CENTER TONE: 3
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: EFFECT: 3
As the number increases, the dialogue becomes stronger.
Normally, select “3.”
• When the center tone is set to other than “CENTER TONE: 3,”
the C.TONE indicator lights up on the display.
As the number increases, the effect becomes stronger.
Normally, select “3.”
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Press SOUND, then press C.TONE
repeatedly.
Press SOUND, then press EFFECT
repeatedly.
NOTE
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
7 Align the vertical localization of the center
7 Adjusting the panorama control for Pro Logic II
channel —CENTER ALIGNMENT
Music—PANORAMA
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes
(except “PLII MUSIC,” “PLIIx MUSIC,” “Neo:6 MUSIC,” and “ALL
CH ST”) is in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
Surround/DSP mode.
This setting is available only when Pro Logic II Music is in use. To
activate Pro Logic II Music, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you
change the setting.
• You cannot adjust the center alignment in the following cases:
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21).
PANORAMA: ON
Select to add “wraparound” sound effect with
side-wall image.
– When Dual Mono software is played back.
– While listening with the headphones.
PANORAMA: OFF Select to listen to originally recorded sound.
Initial setting: PANORAMA: OFF
C ALIGNMENT: ON Select when you cannot feel as if the actors
or singers are speaking or singing on the
screen.
7 Adjusting the sound localization of the center
C ALIGNMENT: OFF Select not to use this function.
channel—CENTER GAIN
Initial setting: C ALIGNMENT: OFF
This setting is available only when Neo:6 Music is in use.
• If you have set “CENTER SPEAKER” to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21), the center gain is not adjustable.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you
change the setting.
Adjustable range: 0 to 1.0 (in 0.1 step intervals)
Initial setting: CENTER GAIN: 0.3
As the number increases, the center channel will be localized
clearly.
Normally, select “0.3.”
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuning in to stations manually
From the remote control ONLY:
Tuner operations
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates
between “FM” and “AM.”
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
Tuner operations are mainly done from the remote control.
2 Press repeatedly or hold TUNING 9 or
( TUNING until the station you want is tuned
in.
• Pressing (or holding) TUNING 9 increases the frequency.
• Pressing (or holding) ( TUNING decreases the frequency.
NOTES
• When you hold and release TUNING 9 or ( TUNING, the
frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in.
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the
TUNED indicator lights up on the display.
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST (stereo)
indicator also lights up.
When operating the
receiver using the remote
control, set the mode
selector to “AUDIO/TV/
VCR/DBS.”
Using preset tuning
Once a station is assigned a channel number, the station can be
quickly tuned simply by selecting the number.You can preset up to
30 FM and 15 AM stations.
To store the preset stations
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
NOTE
When you have selected “FM” or “AM” by using SOURCE
SELECTOR on the front panel, the remote control may not
work for tuner operations. To use the remote control for tuner
operations, select “FM” or “AM” by using the source selecting
button on the remote control.
From the remote control ONLY:
1 Tune in to the station you want to preset (see
“Tuning in to stations manually” above).
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the
FM reception mode” on page 33.
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other
countries use 10 kHz spacing. 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial
setting.
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
• Be sure the receiver is turned off, but is plugged into an AC
outlet when setting the AM tuner interval.
2 Press MEMORY.
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for
about 5 seconds.
On the front panel ONLY:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
To select the 10 kHz interval:
Hold down ADJUST and press
STANDBY/ON.
“10k STEP” appears on the display.
To change back to the 9 kHz interval:
Hold down SETTING and press
“9k STEP” appears on the display.
STANDBY/ON.
NOTE
When you change the AM tuner interval spacing, stored preset
stations are erased. In this case, restore stations.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to
select a channel number while the channel
number position is flashing.
On the front panel:
2 1, 3
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
Before you start, remember...
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
1 Turn SOURCE SELECTOR to select “FM” or
“AM.”
4 Press MEMORY again while the selected
channel number is flashing on the display.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.
The selected channel number stops flashing.
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.
2 PressTUNER PRESET.
“P” appears on the display and MULTI JOG now works for
selecting preset channels.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the
stations you want.
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select a preset channel
To erase a stored preset station
number while “P” appears on the display.
Storing a new station on a used channel number erases the
previously stored one.
• To increase the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG
clockwise.
• To decreases the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG
counterclockwise.
To tune in a preset station
From the remote control:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in and
the numeric buttons now work for tuner operations.
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates
between “FM” and “AM.”
Selecting the FM reception mode
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.
• You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station
(see page 32).
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
2 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to
From the remote control ONLY:
select a preset channel number.
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode
alternates between “AUTO MUTING” and “MONO.”
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO MUTING
Normally select this.
When a program is broadcast in stereo,
you will hear stereo sound; when in
monaural, you will hear monaural sound.
This mode is also useful to suppress
static noise between stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator lights up on the display.
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
MONO
Select this to improve the reception (but
stereo effect will be lost).
In this mode, you will hear noise while
tuning in to the stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator goes off from the
display. (The ST indicator also goes off.)
Initial setting: AUTO MUTING
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introducing the Surround modes
■ Dolby Digital*
Dolby Digital is a digital signal compression method, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, and enables multi-channel encoding and
decoding.
Creating realistic
sound fields
• When Dolby Digital signal is detected through the digital input,
the DOLBY D indicator lights up on the display.
Dolby Digital 5.1CH
Dolby Digital 5.1CH (DOLBY D) encoding method records and
digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel,
center channel, left surround channel, right surround channel, and
LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but the LFE channel is
counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel).
Dolby Digital enables stereo surround sounds, and sets the cutoff
frequency of the surround treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for
Dolby Pro Logic. As such, the sound movement and “being-there”
feeling are enhanced much more than Dolby Pro Logic.
Reproducing theater ambience
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to
reproduce impressive multi-channel sound, reaching you from all
directions.
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound
movement can be expressed.
Surround/DSP modes built in this receiver can create almost the
same Surround sound as you can feel in a real movie theater.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) is a digital surround encoding
format that adds the third surround channels, called “surround
back.”
Compared to the conventional Dolby Digital 5.1CH, these newly
added surround back channels can reproduce more detailed
movements behind you while viewing the video software. In
addition, surround sound localization will become more stable.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Dolby Surround
■ DTS**
DTS is another digital signal compression method, developed by
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., and enables multi-channel
encoding and decoding (1ch up to 6.1ch).
• When DTS signal is detected through the digital input, the DTS
indicator lights up on the display.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is a multi-channel playback format to convert
2-channel software into 5-channel (plus subwoofer). The matrix-
based conversion method used for Dolby Pro Logic II makes no
limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and
enables stereo surround sound.
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic II modes—
Pro Logic II Movie (PLII MOVIE) and Pro Logic II Music (PLII
MUSIC).
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete 5.1 channel
digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.
Compared to Dolby Digital, the DTS Digital Surround format has a
lower audio compression rate which enables it to add breadth and
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround
features natural, solid, and clear sound.
When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the
up on the display.
indicator lights
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded
software.You can enjoy a sound field very close
to the one created with discrete 5.1-channel
sounds.
DTS Extended Surround (DTS-ES)
Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo
DTS-ES is another multi-channel digital encoding format.
It greatly improves the 360-degree surround impression and
space expression by adding the third surround channel—surround
back channel.
software.You can enjoy wide and deep sounds.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DTS-ES includes two signal formats with different surround signal
recording methods—DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch (ES DISCRETE)
and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch (ES MATRIX).
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch has been designed to encode (and
decode) a 6.1-channel signal discretely to avoid interference with
each channel.
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch has been designed to add an extra
surround channel to DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel. By using a
matrix encoding/decoding method, an additional “surround back”
channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right
surround channel signals.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a newly introduced multi-channel playback
format to convert not only multi-channel software but 2-channel
software into 6.1 channel (or 7.1 channel) that developed from
Dolby Pro Logic II. The matrix-based conversion method used for
Dolby Pro Logic IIx makes no limitation for the cutoff frequency of
the surround treble.
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes—
Pro Logic IIx Movie (PLIIx MOVIE) and Pro Logic IIx Music
(PLIIx MUSIC).
When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is activated, the
lights up on the display.
indicator
** “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
PLIIx MOVIE Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded
software.You can enjoy a sound field with a
natural wraparound effect.
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
PLIIx MUSIC Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo
software.You can enjoy wide and deep 6.1-
channel sounds.
• To enjoy software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the
source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this
receiver. (See page 11.)
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using Surround mode, the sounds come out of the
activated speakers which the Surround mode requires.
DTS 96/24
In recent years, there has been increasing interest in higher
sampling rates both for recording and for reproducing at home.
Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency range and greater bit
depths provide extended dynamic range.
DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format (fs 96 kHz/24
bits) introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc. to deliver “better-
than-CD sound quality” into the home.
• When DTS 96/24 signal is detected, the DTS and 96/24
indicators light up.You can enjoy its 5.1-channel sound with full-
quality.
• If either the surround speakers or center speaker is set to
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), the corresponding
channel signals are allocated to and emitted through the front
speakers.
• If both the surround speakers and center speaker are set to
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-
PHONIC processing (which has been developed to create the
surround effect through the front speakers only) is used. The 3D
indicator lights up on the display.
3D HEADPHONE mode
DTS Neo:6
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the Surround
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated
without respect to the type of software played back.
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,
and HP indicators light up.
DTS Neo:6 is another conversion method to create 6-channel
(plus subwoofer) from analog/digital 2-channel software by using
the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix
6.1ch.
• This receiver provides the following DTS Neo:6 modes—Neo:6
Cinema (NEO:6CINEMA) and Neo:6 Music (NEO:6 MUSIC).
When one of them is activated, the NEO:6 indicator lights up on
the display.
About other digital signals
Linear PCM
NEO:6CINEMA Suitable for playing movies.You can get the
same atmosphere with 2-channel software as
with 6.1-channel software. It is also effective for
playing software encoded with conventional
surround formats.
Uncompressed digital audio data used for DVDs, CDs, and
Video CDs.
DVDs support 2 channels with sampling rates of 48/96 kHz, at
quantization of 16/20/24 bits. On the other hand, CDs and
Video CDs are limited to 2 channels with 44.1 kHz at 16 bits.
• When Linear PCM signal is detected, the LPCM indicator
lights up.
NEO:6 MUSIC Suitable for playing music software. The front
channel signals bypass the decoder (resulting in
no loss of sound quality) and the surround
signals transmitted through the other speakers
expand the sound field naturally.
Dual Mono
Dual Mono can be easily understood when you think of the
bilingual broadcast for TV programs (however, the Dual Mono
format is not identical with those analog formats).
This format is now adopted in Dolby Digital, DTS, and so on. It
allows two independent channels (called main channel and
sub-channel) to be recorded separately.
• You can select either channel you want to listen to (see
page 23).
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using the DAP mode, the sounds come out of all the
connected and activated speakers.
Introducing the DSP modes
• If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing
(which has been developed to create the surround effect
through the front speakers only) is used.
The sound heard in a concert hall, club, etc. consists of direct
sound and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from
behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any
reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the
distances of the ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and
indirect sounds are the most important elements of the acoustic
surround effects.
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.
■ MONO FILM
The DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes can create these
important elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling.
In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening
room while viewing monaural sound video software (analog and
2-channel digital signals including Dual Mono signal), you can use
this mode.
The surround effect will be added, and the sound localization of
actor’s words will be improved.
Reflections from behind
Early reflections
This mode cannot be used for multi-channel digital signals.
When “MONO FILM” is used, sounds come out of all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
• If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing
(which has been developed to create the surround effect
through the front speakers only) is used.
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.
• If incoming signals change from 2-channel digital signal to
another digital signal type, “MONO FILM” is canceled and an
appropriate Surround mode is activated.
Direct sounds
The DSP modes include the following modes:
• Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes—HALL1, HALL2, LIVE
CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2
• MONO FILM—Used for all types of 2-channel signals (including
Dual Mono signal)
■ All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
• All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)
This mode cannot be used if the surround speakers are set
to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).
When one of the DSP modes is activated, the DSP indicator lights
up on the display.
■ Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes
You can use the following DAP modes in order to reproduce a
more acoustic sound field in your listening room.
HALL1
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large
shoebox-shaped hall designed primarily for
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about
2000.)
Sound reproduced from
normal stereo
Sound reproduced from All
Channel Stereo mode
HALL2
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large
vineyard-shaped hall designed primarily for
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about
2000.)
3D HEADPHONE mode
LIVE CLUB
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a live music club
with a low ceiling.
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the DSP
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated
without respect to the type of software played back.
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,
and HP indicators light up.
DANCE CLUB Reproduces the spatial feeling of a rocking dance
club.
PAVILION
THEATER1
THEATER2
Reproduces the spatial feeling of an exhibition
hall with a high ceiling.
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large theater
where the seating capacity is about 600.
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a small theater
where the seating capacity is about 300.
NOTE
When “THEATER1” or “THEATER2” is activated while playing
back 2-channel analog or digital source, the built-in Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder is activated and the
indicator lights up.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Surround/DSP modes
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the speaker settings and the incoming signals. See the table below.
• The numbers inside the parentheses following the incoming signal type indicate the number of the front channels and that of the
surround channels. For example, (3/2) indicates that the signals are encoded with three front signals (left/right/center) and two (stereo)
surround signals.
• For EX/ES/PLIIx setting, see page 22.
The name of the mode shown below is the display indication.
EX/ES/PLIIx setting
Incoming Signal Type
AUTO
ON
PLIIx MOVIE
PLIIx MUSIC
OFF
Dolby Digital Surround EX
DOLBY D EX*2*5
DOLBY D EX*2
DOLBY D EX*2*3
D + PLIIx MU*2
DOLBY D
Dolby Digital (3/2, 2/2)
Dolby Digital (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)
Dolby Digital (Dual Mono)
DTS-ES Discrete*1
DOLBY D
DOLBY D EX*2
DOLBY D EX*2*3
DOLBY D
D + PLIIx MU*2
DOLBY D
DUAL MONO
ES DISCRETE*2 ES DISCRETE*2
DTS +
DTS +
DTS +
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
DTS
DTS
DTS
DTS-ES Matrix*1
ES MATRIX*2
DTS
ES MATRIX*2
DTS (3/2, 2/2)*1
DTS + NEO:6*2
DTS (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)
DTS (Dual Mono)
DTS
DUAL MONO
Dolby Digital (2/0)
DTS (2/0)
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
NEO:6CINEMA
NEO:6 MUSIC
PLIIx MOVIE*4/PLIIx MUSIC*4/NEO:6CINEMA/NEO:6 MUSIC
Lenear PCM
Analog
DVD MULTI
None
*1 DTS 96/24 processing is not applied when the EX/ES/PLIIx setting is activated. If you want to apply the processing, set the EX/ES/
PLIIx setting to “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” (see page 22).
*2 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), Virtual Surround Back is activated for the
modes.
*3 When using PLIIx Movie to reproduce Dolby Digital or DTS software, this receiver applies Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) or DTS plus
Dolby Digital EX (DTS +
EX) processing (6.1-channel reproduction) to the software.
*4 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), “PLIIx MOVIE” is changed to “PLII MOVIE”
and “PLIIx MUSIC” is changed to “PLII MUSIC.”
*5 For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied. In this case, select
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”
About the DSP modes
• The following DSP modes are available regardless of incoming signal type:
HALL1, HALL2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2
• When an incoming signal is a multi-channel (more than 2-channel) digital signal, “MONO FILM” is not available.
• You cannot select “ALL CH ST” when the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).
Virtual Surround Back
This function creates the great surround effect from the behind as if you have connected the surround back speaker. The VIRTUAL
SB (Surround Back) indicator lights up on the display.
If you have connected (and activated) the surround speakers, you can use Virtual Surround Back without connecting the surround
back speaker.
Virtual Surround Back is activated when “EX/ES/PLIIx” is set to other than “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” and when playing back the software
including the following signals:
– Dolby Digital Surround EX
– DTS-ES
– Dolby Digital or DTS with more than 4-channels
Virtual Surround Back is activated when one of the Surround modes is selected.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the front panel:
2
Activating the Surround/DSP modes
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the incoming
1, 3
signals. For details, see page 38.
Activating one of the Surround/DSP modes automatically
recalls the memorized settings and adjustments.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
• To adjust the speaker output level, see page 29.
• To adjust the effect level for the DSP mode (except All
Channel Stereo mode,) see page 31.
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD
MULTI.”
• To add “wraparound” sound effect to “PLII MUSIC”
(PANORAMA control,) see page 31.
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or
digital) correctly.
• To adjust the sound localization of the center channel
for “NEO:6 MUSIC” (center gain,) see page 31.
2 Press SURROUND.
• To adjust the vertical localization of the center channel
for Surround/DSP modes (except “PLII MUSIC,”“PLIIx
MUSIC,”“Neo6: MUSIC,” and “ALL CH ST”) (center
alignment,) see page 31.
MULTI JOG now works for selecting Surround/DSP modes.
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select the Surround/DSP
mode you want.
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-
channel software:
NOTES
• You cannot use any Surround/DSP modes when selecting “DVD
MULTI” as the playback source.
• The on-screen display appears on the TV screen to show the
Surround/DSP mode name for 5 seconds when you select the
Surround/DSP mode.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO SURR
HALL1
Surround modes*
HALL2
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to
“SUPERIMPOSE: OFF” (see page 25).
LIVE CLUB
PAVILION
THEATER2
ALL CH ST
(Back to the beginning)
DANCE CLUB
THEATER1
MONO FILM
SURR OFF
From the remote control:
1
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set the
mode selector to
To cancel Surround/DSP modes
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Turn MULTI JOG so that “SURR OFF” appears on the display.
NOTE
The initial setting is “AUTO SURR.”
* Available Surround modes vary depending on the incoming
signals. For details, see “Using the Surround/DSP modes” on
page 38.
2
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD
When you select “AUTO SURR” (Auto Surround)
You can enjoy the Surround mode easily.
MULTI.”
• For details about the Surround modes, see pages 34 to 36.
• When “AUTO SURR” is activated, the AUTO SR indicator lights
up on the display.
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or
digital) correctly.
2 Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the
How does “AUTO SURR” work?
Surround/DSP mode you want.
• If a multi-channel signal comes in, an appropriate Surround
mode will be selected automatically.
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-
channel software:
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal with
surround signal comes in, “PLII MOVIE” will be selected.
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal without
surround signal, or a Linear PCM signal comes in, “SURR
OFF (stereo)” will be selected.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO SURR
HALL1
Surround modes*
HALL2
NOTES
LIVE CLUB
PAVILION
THEATER2
ALL CH ST
(Back to the beginning)
DANCE CLUB
THEATER1
MONO FILM
SURR OFF
• “AUTO SURR” does not take effect in the following cases:
– While playing an analog source.
– While selecting one of the fixed digital decode modes—
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” (see page 13).
• While listening with the headphones, the 3D HEADPHONE
mode (see pages 36 and 37) is activated without respect to the
type of software played back.
To cancel Surround/DSP modes
• When “AUTO SURR” is selected, sound may not come out at
the beginning of playback. If it occurs, select a Surround mode
manually.
Press SURROUND repeatedly so that “SURR OFF” appears on
the display.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections 2: Video cable connection
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—
composite video, S-video, and component video, and the signals
coming into this receiver through one type of video terminals can
output only through the terminal of the same type. So you need to
connect the video components to this receiver using one of the
following three ways.
• When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set
the video input for the DVD player and the VCR correctly (see
“Selecting the component video input mode—DVD VIDEO
INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT” on page 25); otherwise, the correct
input for this receiver will not be selected on the TV.
AV COMPU LINK
remote control
system
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to
operate JVC’s video components (TV, DVD player*, and VCR)
through this receiver.
Case 1*:
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the S-video terminals, connect this receiver to the
TV’s video input 1 terminal using S-video cables.
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which has
added a function to operate JVC’s video components through the
component video jacks. To use this remote control system, you
need to connect the video components you want to operate,
following the diagrams below and the procedures on page 41.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components.
S-video cable
S-video cable
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
* “DVD player” on pages 40 and 41 can be replaced with “DVD
recorder.”
To video input 1
Connections 1: AV COMPU LINK connection
Case 2*:
TV
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the composite video jacks, connect this receiver
to the TV’s video input 2 terminal (composite video input)
using composite video cables.
AV
AV
COMPU LINK-III
COMPU LINK EX
Composite video cable
Composite video cable
Monaural mini-plugs
(not supplied)
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
To video input 2
(Composite)
AV
COMPU
LINK-III
Case 3:
220V
110V
127V
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the component video jacks, connect this receiver
to the TV’s video input 2 terminals (component video
input) using component video cables.
230 -
240V
Component video cable
Component video cable
Monaural
mini-plugs
(not supplied)
AV
COMPU LINK
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
To video input 2
(Component)
DVD player
AV
COMPU LINK
* When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set
“DOWN MIX” and “Y/C SEPARATE” to “OFF”; otherwise, this
system does not work correctly. For details about each setting,
see page 25.
VCR
IMPORTANT:
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the
DBS tuner connected to the DBS IN jacks.
NOTES
• When connecting the receiver and aTV with the AV COMPU LINK
EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode (see page 41).
• When connecting only the VCR and DVD player to this receiver,
connect it directly to the receiver using cable with the monaural
mini-plugs.
• You can connect only the TV with AV COMPU LINK EX or AV
COMPU LINK-III terminal to the AV COMPU LINK-III terminal.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-touch DVD play
Connecting procedure
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input
jacks on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to
“DVR/DVD” or “DVD MULTI.”
1 If you have already plugged your VCR, DVD
player,TV, and this receiver into the AC
outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to
“DVR/DVD DGT.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
2 Connect your VCR, DVD player,TV, and this
receiver as follows, using the cables with the
monaural mini-plugs (not supplied).
• See “Connections 1” on the previous page.
3 Connect the audio input/output jacks on the
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using
the audio cables.
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode
• When you select “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL”) as the source to play on
the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to
the TV tuner so that you can watch TV.
• When you select “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD DGT”), “DVD
MULTI,” “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”), or “DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL”)
as the source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically
changes the input mode to the appropriate position (either video
input 1 or video input 2) so that you can view the playback
picture.
• See pages 7 to 10.
4 Connect the video input/output jacks on the
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using
the S-video cables, composite video cables,
or component video cables.
• See “Connections 2” on the previous page.
5 Plug the AC power cords of the connected
components and this receiver into the AC
outlets.
NOTE
This function does not work when you connect this receiver and
the TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal using a component
video cable. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to Case 1 or
Case 2 on page 40.
6 When turning on the TV for the first time after
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV
volume to the minimum using the TV volume
control on the TV.
Automatic power on/off
The TV, DVD player, and VCR turn on and off along with the
receiver.
7 Turn on other connected components first,
then turn on this receiver.
When you turn on the receiver;
• If the previously selected source is “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL”) or
“DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL”), only the TV will turn on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD
DGT”) or “DVD MULTI,” the TV and DVD player will turn on
automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”),
the TV and VCR will turn on automatically.
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, DVD player, and VCR will
turn off.
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied
with this receiver (press VCR
).
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use
the five basic functions listed below.
Remote control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR using this
remote control
See pages 42 and 43 for details.
NOTE
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each
component.
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR, the VCR
will not turn off, but continue recording.
One-touch video play
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the
VCR, you can enjoy the video playback without setting other
switches manually. The receiver automatically turns on and
changes the source to “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”).
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the
play (3) button on the VCR or on the remote control. So, you can
get the same result.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 VCR
Operating other
JVC products
Set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
You can use the supplied remote control to operate not only
this receiver but also other JVC products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.
Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals—
remote codes “A” and “B.”
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to
“A,” set the manufacturer’s code to “01.”
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to
“B,” set the manufacturer’s code to “02.”
The initial setting is “01.” For details about the setting, see
“Changing the transmittable signals for operating a VCR” on
page 45.
• To operate other products, aim the remote control directly at the
remote sensor on the target product.
You can always perform the following operation:
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.
:
7 TV
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations on
the VCR.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers on the VCR.
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.
Start playback.
1 – 9, 0:
3:
Set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.
Fast-wind a tape.
¡:
1:
Rewind a tape.
REC PAUSE:
Enter recording pause. To start recording,
press this button then 3.
7 DVD recorder or DVD player
To operate the DVD
recorder, set the mode
selector to “DVR.”
You can always perform the following operations:
To operate the DVD player,
set the mode selector to
“DVD.”
TV
:
Turn on or off the TV.
TV VOL +/–:
TV/VIDEO:
Adjust the volume on the TV.
Change the input mode (either video input
or TV tuner) on the TV.
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on the
TV.
CHANNEL +/–:
1 – 9, 0, 100+:
Change the channel numbers.
Select the channel numbers.
TV RETURN (10): Function as the TV RETURN button.
(Switches between the previous channel
and the current channel.)
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After setting the mode selector correctly, you can perform the
following operations on the DVD recorder or DVD player.
For various playback:
(one touch replay):
See the instructions supplied with the DVD recorder or DVD
player for details.
Move the playback position back 10 seconds
before the current position.
RETURN:
CANCEL:
Return to the main menu during menu
operation.
7 Changing the remote control code for DVD
recorder
Cancel the programmed track, etc.
Some JVC DVD recorders can accept four types of the control
signals.You can assign one of the four codes to the remote
control supplied with this receiver for operating your DVD
recorder. For details, refer to the manual supplied with the
DVD recorder.
Only for DVD recorder operations:
CHANNEL +/–: Change the channel numbers.
Initial setting: 03
DVD/HDD:
Select the DVD recorder or HDD deck. (Only for
a DVD recorder incorporated with HDD deck.)
1 Set the mode selector to “DVR.”
(skip):
Move the playback position ahead 30 seconds
after the current position.
2 Press and hold DVR/DVD
3 Press DVR/DVD.
.
1 – 9, 0:
Select a channel number (while stopped) or a
chapter/title number, track number (while playing
back). Press ENTER to enter the number.
4 Enter the remote control code you want using
buttons 1 – 4, and 0.
REC MODE:
REC PAUSE:
Select the recording mode.
EX.: To enter the code “2”, press 0, then 2.
Enter recording pause. To start recording,
press 3.
Code for DVR
Number to enter
1
2
3
4
01
02
03
04
DISPLAY:
Change the display information.
Only for DVD player operations:
5 Release DVR/DVD
.
fs/Rate*:
Show the sampling frequency.
Now, the remote control code has been changed.
TITLE/GROUP: Make the numeric buttons work for selecting the
title/group number.
You can always perform the following operation:
ZOOM:
Zoom in and out.
DVR/DVD
3:
:
Turn on or off the DVD recorder or DVD player.
Start playback.
1 – 10, 0, +10: Select a chapter/title number, track number,
menu item, etc.
DVD/CARD:
Select the disc or memory card to play. (Only for
a DVD player incorporated with memory card
slots.)
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.
¢:
4:
DIMMER:
THUMBNAIL:
SLIDE:
Change the display brightness.
Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) chapter.
Show the thumbnail screen for JPEG discs.
Start the slide show playback for JPEG discs.
¡:
1:
Fast-forward playback.
Fast-reverse playback.
3D/S.EFFECT: Apply the 3D effect.
PAGE: Show browsable still pictures on DVD Audio
discs.
TOP MENU/MENU:
Display the menu recorded on discs.
* Press and hold when using these buttons.
ON SCREEN:
5/∞/3/2:
ENTER:
Shows the on-screen bar.
Select an item on the menu screen.
Enter the selected item, channel number,
chapter/title number, or track number (if
required).
If these buttons do not function normally, use the remote
control supplied with your DVD recorder or DVD player.
Refer also to the manuals supplied with the DVD recorder
or DVD player for details.
You can also use the following buttons to operate JVC DVD
recorder and/or DVD player if it supports the corresponding
function:
For various settings:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
SET UP:
VFP:
Select the audio language/channel.
Select the subtitle language.
Display the Preference display.
Show the picture adjustment screen.
PROGRESSIVE*: Change the scanning mode.
ANGLE: Select the view angle.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturers’ codes for TV
Manufacturer
Codes
Operating other
manufacturers’
products
JVC
Akai
01
02
03
04
05
Bell+Howell
Centurion
Coronad
Daewoo
Emerson
Fisher
06, 07, 08
09, 10, 11, 12, 13
14
GE•Pana
GE•RCA
Gold Star
Hitachi
15, 16
17
18, 19
20, 21
22, 23
24
25
25
By changing the transmittable signals, you can use the
supplied remote control to operate other manufacturers’
products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.
• To operate those components with the remote control, first you
need to set the manufacturers’ codes each for the TV, VCR, and
DBS.
• After replacing batteries of the remote control, set the
manufacturers’ codes again.
KTV
Magnavox
Marantz
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
Philips
26, 27
24
Pioneer
Proscan
Quasar
Radioshack
RCA
28
29
30
31
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a TV
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
02, 17, 32, 33, 34, 35
Samsung
Sanyo
Sears
36, 37
14
38
1 Press and hold TV
2 Press TV.
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
Sharp
Sony
39
40
1 – 9, and 0.
Symphonic
Toshiba
Zenith
41, 42
38
43, 44
See “Manufacturers’ codes for TV” on the right.
4 Release TV
.
Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV.
Initial setting: 01
TV
:
Turn on or off the TV.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
TV VOL +/–:
TV/VIDEO:
Adjust the volume on the TV.
Change the input mode (either TV or
VIDEO).
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on
the TV.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers.
Select the channel numbers.
1 – 9, 0, 100+ (+10):
See the instructions supplied with the TV for details.
5 Try to operate your TV by pressing TV
.
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of TV, try each
one until the correct one is entered.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturers’ codes for VCR
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a VCR
Manufacturer
JVC
Codes
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
01, 02, 03, 04
1 Press and hold VCR
2 Press VCR.
.
Aiwa
Akai
Bell+Howell
Daewoo
Emerson
Fisher
05
06, 07, 08
09
10
11, 12, 13, 14, 15
16, 17, 18, 19
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
1 – 9, and 0.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for VCR” on the right.
G.E.
20, 21
22
23
24
25
20, 26
4 Release VCR
.
Go Video
Gold Star
Go-Video A
Go-Video B
Hitachi
Now, you can perform the following operation on the VCR.
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.
:
Magnavox
Mitsubishi
NEC
27, 28, 29
30, 31, 32, 33
34, 35
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations
on the VCR.
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
Samsung
Sanyo
Scott
Sharp
Shintom
Sony
Symphonic
Teknica
Toshiba
Zenith
36, 37
27
38
39, 40, 41
16, 17, 18, 19
42
43, 44
45
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51
52
53, 54
55
56
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers on the
VCR.
1 – 9, 0:
3:
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.
Start playback.
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback.
¡:
1:
Fast-wind a tape.
Rewind a tape.
See the instructions supplied with the VCR for details.
5 Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR
.
Initial setting: 01
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of VCR, try each
one until the correct one is entered.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a DVD player
a DBS tuner
Set the mode selector to “DVD.”
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
1 Press and hold DVR/DVD
2 Press DVR/DVD.
.
1 Press and hold DBS
2 Press DBS.
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
1 – 9, and 0.
1 – 9, and 0.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player” below.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner” below.
4 Release DVR/DVD
.
4 Release DBS
.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DVD
player.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DBS
tuner.
DVR/DVD
:
Turn on or off the DVD player.
DBS
:
Turn on or off the DBS tuner.
3:
Start playback.
After pressing DBS, you can perform the following operations
on the DBS tuner.
1:
Return to the beginning of the current
chapter (or fast-forward for some models).
¡:
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter
(or fast-reverse for some models).
CHANNEL +/–:
1 – 9, 0:
Change the channel numbers on the
DBS tuner.
7:
Stop playback.
Select the channel numbers on the
DBS tuner.
8:
Pause playback.
MENU:
Display the menu recorded on DVD
VIDEO discs.
See the instructions supplied with the DBS tuner for details.
5/∞/3/2:
ENTER:
1 – 9, 0:
Select an item on the menu screen.
Enter the selected item.
5 Try to operate your DBS tuner by pressing
DBS
.
When your DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the
correct code.
Select the chapter number.
See the instructions supplied with the DVD player for details.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DBS tuner,
try each one until the correct one is entered.
5 Try to operate your DVD player by pressing
DVR/DVD
.
Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner
When your DVD player turns on or off, you have entered the
correct code.
Manufacturer
Codes
Echostar
G.I.
40
01, 41
02
03, 04, 05, 06
42
43
07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15
16, 17, 18
19
20, 21, 22
23, 24, 44
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
31, 32
45
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DVD player,
try each one until the correct one is entered.
Gemini
Hamlin
Hitachi
Hughes
Jerrold
Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player
Manufacturer
JVC
Hitachi
Codes
01
12
Macom
Magnavox
Oak
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Primestar
RCA
S. Atlanta
Samsung
Sony
Kenwood
Mitsubishi
Onkyo
Panasonic
Philips
05, 08
10
15, 16
04
07
Pioneer
Samsung
Sony
03
14
02
46
33, 34, 35
36
Toshiba
Yamaha
06
09
47
Tocom
Toshiba
Zenith
37
48
38, 39
Initial setting: 01
NOTE
You cannot use this remote control to operate other
manufacturers’ DVD recorder.
Initial setting: 01
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If
there are any problems you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s
service center.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The power cord is not plugged in.
SOLUTION
The power does not come on.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
The receiver turns off (enters standby
mode).
Speakers are overloaded because of high
volume.
1. Stop the playback source.
2. Turn on the receiver again, then turn the
volume down.
Speakers are overloaded because of a
short circuit at the speaker terminals.
Check the speaker wiring. If speaker wiring
is not short-circuited, contact your dealer.
The receiver is overloaded because of a
high voltage.
Consult your dealer after unplugging the
power cord.
“OVER HEAT” flashes on the display,
then the receiver turns off.
The receiver is overloaded because of high Turn on the receiver again. If the receiver
volume or long time usage.
turns off soon, consult your dealer after
unplugging the power cord.
No sound from speakers.
Speaker signal cables are not connected.
Check speaker wiring, then reconnect if
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging
the power cord.
Connections are incorrect.
Check the audio connections (see pages 7
to 11) after unplugging the power cord.
An incorrect source is selected.
Muting is activated.
Select the correct source.
Press MUTING to cancel the mute (see
page 15).
An incorrect input mode (analog or digital)
is selected.
Select the correct input mode (analog or
digital).
TV Direct is activated.
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).
Sound from one speaker only.
Speaker signal cables are not connected
properly.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging
the power cord.
Bass sound is reinforced too much
when listening in stereo.
Appropriate bass level is not selected.
The sounds may be intermittently distorted
Adjust audio position level (see page 14).
Sounds are intermittently distorted or
the noise is heard by the outside noise or the noise may be heard by the outside
This is not a malfunction. But if this
continues, turn on the receiver again.
such as a lightning discharge.
noise such as a lightning discharge but the
sound will be restored automatically.
No picture is displayed on the monitor. Connections are incorrect.
Input mode is incorrect.
Check the video connections (see pages 7
to 10) after unplugging the power code.
Check the component video input mode
(see page 25).
Remote control does not operate as
you intend.
The remote control is not ready for your
intended operation.
Set the mode selector correctly, then press
the corresponding source selecting button
or SOUND before operation
Remote control does not work.
There is an obstruction hiding the remote
sensor on the receiver.
Remove the obstruction.
Batteries are weak.
Replace batteries.
The mode selector is set to the incorrect
position.
Set the mode selector to the proper
position.
Buttons cannot be used.
TV Direct is activated.
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM Incoming signal is too weak.
reception.
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact
your dealer.
The station is too far away.
Select another station.
The wrong antenna is being used.
Check with your dealer to be sure you have
the correct antenna.
Antennas are not connected properly.
Check the connections.
Occasional cracking noise during FM
reception.
Ignition noise from automobiles.
Move the antenna farther from automobile
traffic.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Specifications
Composite video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:
Y (luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
C (chrominance, burst):
Component: DVR/DVD, VCR:
Y (luminance):
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
PB, PR:
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Video Output Level/Impedance:
Designs and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Composite video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
Y (luminance):
C (chrominance, burst):
Component: MONITOR OUT:
Y (luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Amplifier
Output Power
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω
At stereo operation:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Negative
Front channels:
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10%
total harmonic distortion.
PB, PR:
Synchronization:
At surround operation:
Front channels:
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
FM tuner (IHF)
Tuning Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
Monaural:
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
Center channel:
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 Ω at
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Monaural:
Surround channels: 100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
16.0 dBf (1.7 µV/75 Ω)
37.5 dBf (20.5 µV/75 Ω)
Stereo:
Stereo Separation at OUT(REC): 35 dB at 1 kHz
Surround back channel:
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 Ω at
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
AM tuner
Tuning Range:
* Measured on AC 110 V, 127 V, 220 V, and 240 V.
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
Audio
General
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Power Requirements:
AC 110 V/127 V/220 V/230 V – 240 V
adjustable with the voltage selector,
50 Hz/60 Hz
,
DVR/DVD (DVD MULTI), VCR, DBS, TV:
330 mV/47 kΩ
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)*:
Power Consumption:
120 W (at operation)
Coaxial: DIGITAL IN 1(DVR/DVD):
5 W (in standby mode)
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Optical: DIGITAL IN 2(DBS), 3(VCR):
–21 dBm to –15 dBm
Dimensions (W x H x D): 435 mm x 70 mm x 317.2 mm
Mass: 6.3 kg
(660 nm 30 nm)
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS (with
sampling frequency—32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).
Audio Output Level:
DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
330 mV
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/DIN): 80 dB/62 dB
Frequency Response (8 Ω):
Bass Boost:
20 Hz to 20 kHz ( 1 dB)
+4 dB 1 dB at 100 Hz
Equalization (at DSP operation):
Center frequency:
Control range:
63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz
8 dB
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)
DIGITAL IN
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
ANTENNA
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
Y
PB
PR
220V
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
PCM/
STREAM
BACK
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
VCR
IN
FM 75
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
VIDEO
DVD MULTI IN
AM EXT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
230 -
240V
L
127V
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
R
AV
VCR
DVR/DVD
IN
SUB-
VCR
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
COMPU
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
DVR
OUT
(REC)
IN
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
WOOFER
OUT (REC)
(PLAY)
(PLAY)
OUT
LINK-III
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
220V
230 -
240V
127V
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your
mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the
position of the voltage selector switch provided on
the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset
the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
EN, CS
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0505RYMMDWJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
RX-F31S
INSTRUCTIONS
LVT1306-011B
[UJ]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions, and Others
Caution––
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely.
The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not
STANDBY/ON button!
disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper
or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be
considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of
these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.
Locate the apparatus as follows:
Front:
Sides:
Back:
No obstructions open spacing.
No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back.
No obstructions, place on the level surface.
Bottom:
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.
Spacing 15 cm or more
RX-F31S
Front
Wall or
obstructions
Stand height 15 cm or more
Floor
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Parts identification ................................................ 2
Getting started ...................................................... 4
Before Installation .................................................................. 4
Checking the supplied accessories ....................................... 4
Putting batteries in the remote control ................................... 4
Setting the voltage selector ................................................... 4
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 5
Connecting the speakers ....................................................... 6
Connecting video components .............................................. 7
Connecting the power cord .................................................. 11
Basic operations ................................................. 12
1 Turn on the power ............................................................. 12
2 Select the source to play .................................................. 12
3 Adjust the volume ............................................................. 13
Selecting the digital decode mode....................................... 13
Adjusting the subwoofer audio position ............................... 14
Activating TV Direct ............................................................. 14
Turning off the sounds temporarily ...................................... 15
Changing the display brightness.......................................... 15
Turning off the power with the Sleep Timer ......................... 15
Basic settings...................................................... 16
Setting the speaker information automatically
—Smart Surround Setup ............................................... 16
Basic setting items ............................................................... 18
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 18
Menu operation buttons................................................... 18
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 19
Menu operating procedure................................................... 20
Setting the items .................................................................. 21
Setting the speakers ....................................................... 21
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting—EX/ES/PLIIx ........... 22
Selecting the main or sub channel—DUAL MONO ......... 23
Setting bass sound.......................................................... 23
Using the Midnight mode—MIDNIGHT MODE ............... 24
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminals
—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3 ................................................... 24
Selecting the component video input mode
—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT ............... 25
Superimposing the menus—SUPERIMPOSE ................ 25
Converting S-video signals into composite video signals
—DOWN MIX............................................................ 25
Converting composite video signals into S-video signals
—Y/C SEPARATE ..................................................... 25
Sound adjustments ............................................. 26
Basic adjustment items........................................................ 26
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 26
Menu operation buttons................................................... 26
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 27
Menu operating procedure................................................... 28
Adjusting the items .............................................................. 29
Adjusting speaker output level ........................................ 29
Adjusting the equalization patterns
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz ........ 30
Adjusting the bass sounds .............................................. 30
Adjusting the sound parameters for the
Surround/DSP modes ............................................... 31
Tuner operations ................................................. 32
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing .................................. 32
Tuning in to stations manually.............................................. 32
Using preset tuning .............................................................. 32
Selecting the FM reception mode ........................................ 33
Creating realistic sound fields........................... 34
Reproducing theater ambience ........................................... 34
Introducing the Surround modes ......................................... 34
Introducing the DSP modes................................................. 37
Using the Surround/DSP modes ......................................... 38
Activating the Surround/DSP modes ................................... 39
AV COMPU LINK remote control system .......... 40
Operating other JVC products ........................... 42
Operating other manufacturers’ products ........ 44
Troubleshooting .................................................. 47
Specifications...................................................... 48
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
See pages in parentheses for details.
Parts identification
1
2
TV DIRECT button (14)
Source selecting buttons (12, 14, 32, 33)
DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, DVD MULTI, FM/AM
Operating buttons for tuner (32, 33)
3
4
( TUNING, FM MODE, TUNING 9, MEMORY
On-screen display operation buttons (18, 26)
Cursor buttons (3, 2, 5, ∞),
SET
5
6
7
8
9
SMART SURROUND SETUP button (16)
EX/ES button (22)
SOUND button (13, 14, 22, 24, 30, 31)
SURROUND button (39)
Adjusting buttons for speaker and subwoofer output levels (29)
FRONT L +/–, FRONT R +/–, CENTER +/–, SUBWFR +/–,
SURR L +/–, SURR R +/–, S.BACK +/–
AUDIO button (12, 14)
MUTING button (15)
VOLUME +/– button (13)
Mode selector (12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 26, 29 – 32, 39)
DVR, DVD, AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
MENU button (18, 26)
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
-
REMOTE CONTROL RM SRXF31U
1
2
p
q
w
e
p
r
t
• Numeric buttons (33)
q
w
• Adjusting buttons (13, 14, 24, 30, 31)
DECODE, EQ FREQ, BASS BOOST, C.TONE,
EQ LEVEL 9, MIDNIGHT, EFFECT, EQ LEVEL (,
A.POSITION
e
y
u
i
o
DIMMER button (15)
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (12)
TEST TONE button (17, 29)
3
SLEEP button (15)
r
SET
The buttons which are not indicated here can be used for
operating other JVC products or other manufacturers’ products.
For details, see pages 42 to 46.
4
5
• When operating this receiver, set the mode selector (e)
to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
• When operating a JVC DVD recorder, set the mode
selector (e) to “DVR.”
t
• When operating a JVC DVD player, set the mode selector
(e) to “DVD.”
6
y
u
7
8
9
i
o
To open the cover of the
remote control, push here
then slide downward.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See pages in parentheses for details.
Front panel
1
2
3
4
SOURCE
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
RX-F31
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
/
MULTI JOG
DVR MULTI
DVR
/
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
FM / AM
SET / TUNER PRESET
STANDBY
PHONES
/
ON
TV DIRECT
SETTING
ADJUST
SURROUND
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
1
2
STANDBY/ON button and standby lamp (12, 14, 32)
Source lamps
7
SETTING button (18, 32)
ADJUST button (26, 32)
SURROUND button (39)
Remote sensor (4)
Display window (see below)
• SET button (17, 18, 26)
8
9
p
q
w
DVD MULTI, DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, FM/AM
• SOURCE SELECTOR (12, 14, 33)
• MULTI JOG (18, 26, 33, 39)
MASTER VOLUME control (13)
PHONES jack (13)
3
4
5
6
• TUNER PRESET button (33)
TV DIRECT button (14)
Display window
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
9
0
-
8
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
PL
x
LPCM
L
C
R
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
$
~
! @ #
%
^
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EQ indicator (30)
C.TONE indicator (31)
VIRTUAL SB indicator (38)
and indicator (35)
AUDIO P. (position) indicator (14)
Neo:6 indicator (36)
BASS indicator (30)
Tuner operation indicators (32)
TUNED, ST (stereo)
-
=
ATT (attenuator) indicator (30)
Digital signal format indicators (13, 34 – 36)
LPCM (Linear PCM), DOLBY D (Dolby Digital), DTS, 96/24
Signal and speaker indicators (15)
DSP indicator (36, 37)
AUTO SR (surround) indicator (39)
3D indicator (36, 37)
~
!
@
#
$
%
Main display
Frequency unit indicators
MHz (for FM station), kHz (for AM station)
HP (headphones) indicator (13, 36, 37)
9
0
AUTO MUTING indicator (33)
SLEEP indicator (15)
^
Rear panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
ANTENNA
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
Y
PB
PR
110V
220V
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
PCM/
STREAM
BACK
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
FM 75
VCR
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
DVD MULTI IN
AM EXT
COAXIAL
IN
AUDIO
230 -
240V
L
127V
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
R
AV
VCR
DVR/DVD
IN
SUB-
VCR
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
COMPU
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
DVR
OUT
IN
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
WOOFER
OUT (REC)
(PLAY)
(REC)
(PLAY)
OUT
LINK-III
7
8
9
p q
w
1
2
3
Power cord (11)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (4)
DVD MULTI IN jacks (8)
SUBWOOFER, CENTER, SURR-R, SURR-L
ANTENNA terminals (5)
DIGITAL IN terminals (11)
• Coaxial: 1(DVR/DVD)
• Optical: 2(DBS), 3(VCR)
DIGITAL OUT terminal (11)
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR) jacks (7 – 10)
VCR IN, DVR/DVD IN, MONITOR OUT
8
VIDEO terminals (7 – 10)
VIDEO (composite video) jacks, S-VIDEO terminals
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT
AUDIO jacks (7 – 10)
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN, TV IN
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER OUT jack (6)
AV COMPU LINK-III terminals (40)
SPEAKERS terminals (6)
FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND, SURROUND BACK
4
5
9
p
q
w
6
7
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Putting batteries in the remote control
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.
Getting started
1
2
3
1 Press and slide the battery cover on the back
Before Installation
of the remote control.
2 Insert batteries.
General precautions
• Be sure your hands are dry.
• Turn the power off to all components.
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going
to connect.
Make sure to match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
3 Replace the cover.
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases,
replace the batteries. Use two R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell
batteries.
Locations
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from
moisture and dust.
• Supplied butteries are for initial setup. Replace for continued
use.
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C
and 35˚C.
CAUTION:
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.
• Leave sufficient distance between the receiver and the TV.
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage.
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.
Handling the receiver
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or
cabinet.
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When
unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage
the cord.
• When you are away on travel or otherwise for an extended
period or time, remove the plug from the wall outlet. A small
amount of power is always consumed while the power cord is
connected to the wall outlet.
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on the front panel.
Remote sensor
The receiver has a built-in cooling fan which operates
while the receiver is turned on. Be sure to leave enough
ventilation to obtain sufficient cooling effect.
CAUTION:
To operate the receiver, set
the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all
connections are completed.
Checking the supplied accessories
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied
accessories. If anything is missing, contact your dealer
immediately.
Setting the voltage selector
Before connections, always do the following first if necessary.
Select the correct voltage in VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear
of the receiver by using a screw driver.
• Remote control (× 1)
• Batteries (× 2)
• AM loop antenna (× 1)
• FM antenna (× 1)
• Digital coaxial cable (× 1)
• AC plug adaptor (× 1)
• Check to be sure if the voltage mark is set to the voltage for
your area where this unit plugs in.
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
220V
230 -
240V
127V
Voltage mark
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Snap the tabs on the loop
into the slots of the base to
assemble the AM loop
antenna.
If FM reception is poor, connect an
outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM 75
If AM reception is poor, connect
AM EXT
COAXIAL
an outdoor single vinyl-covered
wire (not supplied).
FM antenna (supplied)
220V
110V
127V
ANTENNA
230 -
240V
NOTES
AM antenna connection
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl,
remove the vinyl while twisting it as shown on the
right.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch
any other terminals, connecting cords and power
cord. This could cause poor reception.
Connect the AM loop antenna supplied to the AM LOOP
terminals.
Connect the white cord to the AM EXT terminal, and connect the
black cord to the H terminal.
Turn the loop until you have the best reception.
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered
wire (not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. Keep the AM loop
antenna connected.
FM antenna connection
Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL
terminal as a temporary measure.
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor FM antenna (not
supplied). Before attaching a 75 Ω coaxial cable with a
connector (IEC or DIN 45325) , disconnect the supplied FM
antenna.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the speakers
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
Speaker Layout Diagram
C
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
SW
RS
L
R
Center speaker (C)
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
LS
SB
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
BACK
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
SPEAKERS
Powered
subwoofer
(SW)
AV
COMPU
LINK-III
SUB-
WOOFER
OUT
Right front speaker
(R)
Left front speaker
(L)
Surround back
speaker (SB)
Left surround
speaker (LS)
Right surround
speaker (RS)
Connecting the speakers
Connecting the powered subwoofer
By connecting a subwoofer, you can enhance the bass or
reproduce the original LFE signals recorded in digital software.
Turn off all components before making connections.
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the
SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cord
with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
2
3
1
1
2
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your subwoofer.
After connecting all the speakers and/or a subwoofer, set the
speaker setting information properly to obtain the best possible
surround effect. For details, see pages 16, 17, and 21 to 23.
1 Twist and remove the insulation at the end of each
NOTE
speaker cord.
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.
2 Press and hold the clamp of the speaker terminal
(1), then insert the speaker cord (2).
• For each speaker, connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the
rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the
speakers.
3 Release the finger from the clamp.
CAUTIONS:
• Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the
speaker terminals (6 Ω – 16 Ω).
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker
terminal.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting video components
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
This receiver is equipped with the following video terminals—
composite video, S-video, and component video terminals.
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or
component video (Y, PB, PR) jacks, connect them using an S-
video cable (not supplied) or component video cable (not
supplied). By using these terminals, you can get a better picture
quality in the order:
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their
manuals.
DO NOT use a TV through a VCR or a TV with a built-in
VCR; otherwise, the picture may be distorted.
Component > S-video > Composite
IMPORTANT:
CAUTION:
Component video signals are transmitted only through component
video output jacks. Therefore, if a recording video component and
a playing video component are connected to the receiver through
the video terminals of different type, you cannot record the picture.
In addition, if the TV and a playing video component are
connected to the receiver through the video terminals of different
type, you cannot view the playback picture on the TV.
On the other hand, S-video signals and composite video signals
can be converted into each other and transmitted through the
corresponding output jack. For details about the settings of the
conversion, see page 25.
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic
equalizer between the source components and this receiver, the
sound output through this receiver may be distorted.
If your video components have AV COMPU LINK terminal
See also page 40 for detailed information about the connection
and the AV COMPU LINK remote control system.
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its stereo output jacks (DVR/DVD):
Red
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
AUDIO
White
Red
DVR
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
OUT
(REC)
OUT (REC)
DVD recorder or
DVD player
Å
ı
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç Î
Composite video cable
(not supplied)
‰ Ï
Ì
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
VCR
IN
DVR/DVD
IN
S-VIDEO
VCR
OUT
(REC)
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
S-video cable (not supplied)
COMPONENT
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel output
NOTES
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right audio channel
input
Ç Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input
Î To composite video output
‰ To S-video output
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input
Ì To component video output
• When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the
component video input jacks, make the component video input
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see
page 25.
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for
a DVD recorder and DVD player is set to use the digital coaxial
terminal (DIGITAL IN 1 (DVR/DVD)). For details of digital
connection, see page 11.
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its analog discrete output jacks (DVD MULTI IN):
This connection is the best connection method for enjoying DVD Audio sounds. When a DVD Audio disc is played back, the original high-
quality sounds can be reproduced only using this connection.
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
Monaural audio cable
(not supplied)
Red
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
Red
AUDIO
White
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
DVR
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
OUT
(REC)
Red
OUT (REC)
DVD MULTI IN
Å ı Ç Î ‰
220V
110V
230 -
240V
127V
Ï
DVD recorder or
DVD player
Ì Ó È Ô
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
Composite video
VCR
IN
cable (not supplied)
DVR/DVD
IN
S-VIDEO
VCR
OUT
(REC)
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT
S-video cable (not supplied)
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right front channel audio output
NOTE
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right front channel
audio input
Ç To left/right surround channel audio output
Î To center channel audio output
‰ To subwoofer output
When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the
component video input jacks, make the component video input
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see
page 25.
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input
Ì To composite video output
Ó To S-video output
È Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input
Ô To component video output
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
About “DVD MULTI”
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source (see page 12), you can enjoy analog discrete output sound (5.1-channel reproduction)
from the connected component.
• You may need to select analog discrete output mode on the component.
NOTES
• When using the headphones, you can listen to the front channel sounds (left and right) only. 3D HEADPHONE mode (see pages 36
and 37) is not available.
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected source—
“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” and “DBS” (see page 14).
• Surround/DSP modes (see pages 34 to 39) are not available for “DVD MULTI.”
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a VCR
Turn off all components before making connections.
Red
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
White
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)
White
Red
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
Å
ı
VCR
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
‰ Ï Ì
Y
PB
PR
Î
Composite video
VCR
IN
cable (not supplied)
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VCR
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
DBS
IN
COMPONENT
S-video cable (not supplied)
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel output
NOTES
ı To left/right audio channel input
Ç To composite video input
Î To composite video output
‰ To S-video output
• When connecting a VCR to the component video input jacks,
make the component video input setting (VCR VIDEO INPUT)
correctly. If you do not, you cannot view the playback picture on
the TV or the AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot
operate properly. For details, see page 25.
Ï To S-video input
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for
a video component other than DVD recorder and DVD player is
set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 3 (VCR)). For
details of digital connection, see page 11.
Ì To component video output
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
7 Connecting a DBS tuner
White
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
TV
IN
Red
Å
DBS tuner
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
ı
Composite video cable (not supplied)
S-video cable (not supplied)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
Å To left/right audio channel output
ı To composite video output
Ç To S-video output
NOTE
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for a
TV is set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 2 (DBS)).
For details of digital connection, see page 11.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a TV
Connect the TV to the appropriate MONITOR OUT jacks to view the playback picture from any other connected video components.
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
Red
White
L
Stereo audio cable
White
Red
(not supplied)
Å ı
R
SUB-
WOOFER
OUT
TV
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
Î ‰
Y
PB
PR
VCR
Composite video cable
(not supplied)
IN
DVR/DVD
IN
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
S-video cable (not supplied)
COMPONENT
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel input
NOTES
ı To left/right audio channel output
Ç To composite video input
Î To S-video input
‰ To component video input
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. For details of digital connection, see page 11.
• When connecting a TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR
OUT jacks, the on-screen display does not appear on the TV
screen (see page 25).
IMPORTANT:
Audio signals come out through the MONITOR OUT (L/R) jacks
ONLY when TV Direct is in use (see page 14).
Connect these jacks to the audio input jacks corresponding to the
video connection; otherwise, no sound comes out of the TV
speaker when TV Direct is in use.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Digital output terminal
You can connect any digital components which have an optical
digital input terminal.
Digital connection
This receiver is equipped with three DIGITAL IN terminals—one
digital coaxial terminal and two digital optical terminals—and one
DIGITAL OUT terminal.
To reproduce the digital sound, use the digital connection in
addition to the analog connection methods described on pages 7
to 10.
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Digital coaxial cable (supplied: 1 cable)
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
DIGITAL OUT
PCM/
STREAM
Turn off all components before making connections.
Connecting digital recording equipment to the
DIGITAL OUT terminal enables you to perform
digital-to-digital recording.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their
manuals.
7 Digital input terminals
220V
110V
127V
NOTE
230 -
240V
The digital signal format transmitted through the DIGITAL OUT
terminal is the same as that of the input signal. For example,
when the DTS signals are input, the DTS signals are transmitted.
When the component has a digital coaxial output
terminal, connect it to the 1(DVR/DVD) terminal,
using a digital coaxial cable (supplied).
Connecting the power cord
When all the audio/video connections have been made, connect
the AC power plug to the wall outlet. Make sure that the plugs are
inserted firmly. The standby lamp lights in red.
CAUTIONS:
1(DVR/DVD)
DIGITAL IN
2(DBS)
3(VCR)
• Do not plug in before setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch
on the rear of the receiver and all connection procedures are
complete.
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not alter, twist or pull the power cord, or put anything heavy
on it, which may cause fire, electric shock, or other accidents.
• If the cord is damaged, consult a dealer and have the power
cord replaced with a new one.
When the component has a digital optical output
terminal, connect it to the 2(DBS) or 3(VCR)
terminal, using a digital optical cable (not supplied).
NOTES
• Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen
interference.
Before connecting a digital
optical cable, unplug the
protective plug.
• The preset settings such as preset channels and sound
adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases:
– When you unplug the power cord.
– When a power failure occurs.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the supplied
AC plug adaptor.
NOTES
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have
been set for use with the following components:
– 1(DVR/DVD): For DVD recorder or DVD player
– 2(DBS):
– 3(VCR):
For DBS tuner
For VCR
If you connect other components, change the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. See “Setting the digital
input (DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.
• Select the digital input mode. See “Selecting the analog or
digital input mode” on page 12.
• When you want to operate the connected component (except
DBS tuner) using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system
(see pages 40 and 41), connect them also as described on
pages 7 to 10.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the source to play
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until the source name
you want appears on the display.
Basic operations
On the front panel:
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights in
red.
• As you turn SOURCE SELECTOR, the source changes as
follows:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
The on-screen display appears on the TV screen for 5 seconds
(except “turning off the sounds temporarily”) to show the
indication in the following cases:
– When you select the source (see right column).
– When you adjust the volume (see page 13).
– When you turn off the sounds temporarily (see page 15).
– When you select the Surround/DSP modes (see page 39).
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to “SUPERIMPOSE:
OFF” (see page 25).
DVD MULTI
DVR/DVD (DGT)
DBS (DIGITAL)
VCR (DIGITAL)
TV (DIGITAL)
(Back to the beginning)
FM
AM
DVD MULTI:
Select for the DVD player using the analog
discrete output mode (5.1-channel
reproduction).
1
2
3
DVR/DVD (DGT) : Select for the DVD recorder or DVD player.
*
VCR (DIGITAL) : Select for the VCR.
*
DBS (DIGITAL) : Select for the DBS tuner.
*
Source lamps
TV (DIGITAL) :
Select for the TV.
*
FM:
AM:
Select for an FM broadcast.
Select for an AM broadcast.
1
2
From the remote control:
Press one of the source selecting buttons.
• For the tuner, press FM/AM. Each time you press FM/AM, the
band alternates between “FM” and “AM.”
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set
the mode selector to
3
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
* Selecting the analog or digital input mode
For a component you have connected using both the analog
connection and the digital connection methods (see pages 7 to 11),
you need to select the correct input mode.
• You can select the digital input only for sources which you have
selected digital input terminals for. (See “Setting the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.)
From the remote control ONLY:
Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to select the
analog or digital input mode.
1 Turn on the power
AUDIO on the
• Each time you press the button, the input mode alternates
between the analog input (“ANALOG”) and the digital input
(“DGTL AUTO”).
Press
STANDBY/ON (or
This setting is memorized for each source.
remote control).
The standby lamp goes off and the source lamp of the current
source lights in red.
DGTL AUTO:
Select for the digital input mode. The receiver
automatically detects the incoming signal
format, then the digital signal format indicator
(LPCM, DOLBY D, DTS, or DTS 96/24) for
the detected signal lights up.
Current source name appears.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
ANALOG:
Select for the analog input mode.
Initial setting: DGTL AUTO
To turn off the power (into standby)
NOTE
Press
again.
STANDBY/ON (or
AUDIO on the remote control)
When you select “DVD MULTI,” “FM,” or “AM” as the source, the
analog and digital input mode is not available.
The standby lamp lights in red.
NOTE
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn
the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust the volume
Selecting the digital decode mode
If the following symptoms occur while playing Dolby Digital or DTS
software with “DGTL AUTO” selected (see page 12), follow the
procedure below:
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or
tracks.
To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME
control clockwise (or press VOLUME + on the
remote control).
To decrease the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME
control counterclockwise (or press VOLUME – on
the remote control).
• When you adjust the volume, the volume level indication
appears on the display for a while.
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SOUND, then press DECODE to select
“DOLBY D” or “DTS.”
• Each time you press DECODE, the digital decode mode
changes as follows:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
CAUTION:
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any
sources. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of
sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin
your speakers.
DGTL AUTO
DOLBY D
(Back to the beginning)
DTS
• To play back software encoded with Dolby Digital, select
“DOLBY D.”
• To play back software encoded with DTS, select “DTS.”
NOTE
The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0”
(minimum) to “50” (maximum).
NOTES
• When you turn off the power or select another source,
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” is canceled and the digital decode mode is
automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you
intend.
Listening with headphones
You can enjoy not only stereo software but also multi-channel
software through the headphones. (Sounds are down-mixed to the
front channels while playing multi-channel software.)
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
front panel to activate the HEADPHONE mode.
The HP (headphone) indicator lights up on the display.
• You can also enjoy the Surround/DSP mode through the
headphones—3D HEADPHONE mode. For details, see pages
36 and 37.
• Disconnecting a pair of headphones from the PHONES jack
cancels the HEADPHONE (or 3D HEADPHONE) mode and
activates the speakers.
The following digital signal format indicators on the display
indicate what type of signal comes into the receiver.
LPCM:
Lights up when Linear PCM signal comes in.
DOLBY D: • Lights up when Dolby Digital signal comes in.
• Flashes when “DOLBY D” is selected for any
software other than Dolby Digital.
CAUTION:
DTS:
• Lights up when conventional DTS signal comes
in.
• Flashes when “DTS” is selected for any
software other than DTS.
Be sure to turn down the volume:
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume
can damage both the headphones and your hearing.
• Before removing headphones, as high volume may output from
the speakers.
DTS 96/24: Lights up when DTS 96/24 signal comes in.
NOTE
When “DGTL AUTO” cannot recognize the incoming signal, no
digital signal format indicator lights up on the display.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Activating TV Direct
TV Direct enables you to use this receiver as an AV selector
while the receiver is turned off.
When TV Direct is activated, the pictures and sounds go from the
video components such as DVD player to the TV through this
receiver. Thus, you can use the video components and the TV as
if they were connected directly.
• This function takes effect for the following sources—DVR/DVD,
VCR, and DBS.
To activate (or deactivate) TV Direct, follow the procedure below:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set
the mode selector to
1 Press TV DIRECT.
All the indications disappear, then the source lamp of the
current source lights in green.
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
2 Turn on the video component and TV.
3 Select the target video component.
On the front panel:
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until one of the
source lamps—DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS—lights
in green.
From the remote control:
Press one of the source selecting buttons—
DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS.
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights
in green.
Adjusting the subwoofer audio
position
If the subwoofer sound is much reinforced for stereo sound
compared to the sound reproduced with multi-channel, set the
subwoofer audio position. The subwoofer output level is
automatically decreased by the selected value when you are
listening in stereo.
To cancel TV Direct and turn off the receiver, press
STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or
control).
AUDIO on the remote
The receiver is turned off and the standby lamp lights up.
The AUDIO P. indicator lights up when this function is activated.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
To cancel TV Direct and turn on the receiver, press TV DIRECT
again.
The receiver is turned on and the source lamp currently selected
lights in red.
From the remote control ONLY:
NOTES
Press SOUND, then press A.POSITION repeatedly.
• When TV Direct is activated, you cannot enjoy any of the sound
effects the receiver produces, and cannot use the speakers
connected to the receiver.
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI,” “FM,” or “AM” is
selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected
source—“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” or “DBS.”
• Each time you press A.POSITION, the subwoofer audio position
level changes as follows:
AUDIO P. indicator
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
–2
–4
–6
OFF (canceled)
The smaller the number becomes, the more the level decreases
automatically when listening in stereo.
• If no adjustment is required, select “OFF” (initial setting).
NOTES
• The minimum subwoofer output level is –10 dB.
Ex.: When setting the subwoofer output level to “–8 (dB)” and
the subwoofer audio position to “–4 (dB),” the subwoofer
output level when listening in stereo will be –10 dB.
To adjust the subwoofer output level, see page 29.
• This function is not available when the Surround/DSP mode is
activated or “DVD MULTI” is selected.
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you
intend.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel the Sleep Timer:
Press SLEEP repeatedly so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the
display. (The SLEEP indicator goes off.)
• The Sleep Timer is also canceled when:
– You turn off the receiver, or
Turning off the sounds temporarily
From the remote control ONLY:
– TV Direct is activated.
Press MUTING to turn off the sound through all
connected speakers and headphones.
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off.
Basic adjustment of auto memory
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source:
• when you turn off the power, and
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
• when you change the source.
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the
newly selected source are automatically recalled.
The following can be stored for each source:
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 12)
• Subwoofer audio position (see page 14)
• Midnight mode (see page 24)
• Speaker output level (see page 29)
• Digital equalization pattern (see page 30)
• Bass boost (see page 30)
• Pressing VOLUME +/– (or turning MASTER VOLUME control
on the front panel) also restores the sound.
Changing the display brightness
You can dim the display—Dimmer.
• Subwoofer phase (see page 30)
• Input attenuator mode (see page 30)
• Surround/DSP mode selection (see page 39)
From the remote control ONLY:
Press DIMMER repeatedly.
• Each time you press the button, the display brightness changes
as follows:
NOTE
If the source is “FM” or “AM,” you can assign a different setting
for each band.
DIMMER 1:
Dims the display slightly.
Dims the blue illumination slightly.
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.
Dims the blue illumination slightly (more than
DIMMER 1).
DIMMER 2:
Signal and speaker indicators on the display
Signal indicators
Speaker indicators
DIMMER 3:
Turns off the display and blue illumination.
(Temporarily canceled when you operate the
receiver.*)
L
C
R
L
C
R
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P.
DIMMER OFF: Cancels the Dimmer (normal display).
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO :
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
x
S.WFRLFE
OLBY D
DTS
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
* Except when activating or deactivating TV Direct.
LS SB RS
The signal indicators light up as follows:
Turning off the power with the Sleep
Timer
L:
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the
left channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the
right channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.
You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer.
R:
C:
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SLEEP repeatedly.
• Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes in 10
minute intervals. The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display.
LS*: Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes
in.
RS*: Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes
SLEEP indicator
in.
SB: Lights up when the surround back channel signal
comes in.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
LFE: Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
* When monaural surround signal comes in, only “S” lights up.
10
20
30
40
90
50
80
60
NOTE
When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, all the signal
indicators except “SB” light up.
OFF (canceled)
70
When the shut-off time comes:
The receiver turns off automatically.
The speaker indicators light up as follows:
S . WFR
• The subwoofer indicator (
) lights up when
“SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER:YES.” For details,
see page 21.
• The other speaker indicators light up only when the
corresponding speaker is set to “SMALL” or “LARGE,” and
also when required for the current playback.
To check or change the remaining time until the shut-off
time:
Press SLEEP once.
The remaining time (in minutes) until the shut-off time appears.
• To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the remote control ONLY:
Basic settings
When operating the receiver using the remote control,
set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
To obtain the best possible sound effect from Surround/DSP
modes (see pages 34 to 39), you need to set up the speaker and
subwoofer information after all the connections are completed.
From pages 16 to 25, how to set speakers and other basic items
of the receiver are explained.
1
Take your position where you listen to the
sound.
• Make sure speaker cables are connected firmly.
Setting the speaker information
automatically—Smart Surround Setup
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect
from the Surround/DSP modes.
By using Smart Surround Setup, the following are automatically
calculated by one simple action—clapping hands.
• Speaker distance (compared to that of the closest speaker)
• Speaker output level (except the subwoofer)
NOTES
2 Press and hold SMART SURROUND SETUP
• Before starting Smart Surround Setup, set the speaker
information correctly (SMALL, LARGE, or NO) according to your
speakers except the subwoofer (see page 21).
• The speakers which are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see
page 21) are not indicated clearly on the TV screen.
• When the setting is made by Smart Surround Setup, the
speaker distance and output level you have set before will be
inactive.
until “SETTING UP” flashes.
*1
*2
*3
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L
C
R
• You can see the setting process on the TV screen and the
display during Smart Surround Setup. If you have turned off the
display, cancel the Dimmer (see page 15); otherwise, you
cannot see the information on the display.
SETTING UP
SB
LS
RS
*6
*4
• Smart Surround Setup will not be done correctly if you or other
object blocks the sound.
• When you change your speakers, do the following procedure
again.
*5
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
L: Left front speaker
C: Center speaker
R: Right front speaker
RS: Right surround speaker
SB: Surround back speaker
LS: Left surround speaker
In this section, the on-screen display on the TV screen is used
for explaining.
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen
when connecting the TV through the COMPONENT
MONITOR OUT jacks (see page 10).
3 When “CLAPYOUR HANDS.” appears, clap
your hands over your head once while the
indications still remain.
• On the display, “SETTING UP” stops flashing.
The receiver starts detecting the level of the sound coming
through each speaker (except the subwoofer).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your clapping sound is detected successfully,
When your clapping sound is not detected correctly,
• On the TV screen, “SUCCESSFUL,” “RESULT,” and the setting
“SETTING UP” appears again after one of the following
values appear. The setting values are shown for about 12
messages. In this case, repeat step 3.
seconds.
Ex.:
SILENT:
• The receiver detects sound from only the left
and right front speakers.
• The receiver detects no sound from the front
speakers and detects sound from at least one of
other speakers.
*7
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L+2
C 0 R+2
STD+0.3m
SILENT-ALL: The receiver cannot detect any sound from any
+0.3m
speaker for about 10 seconds.
AGAIN:
• The receiver cannot detect sound from the left
or right front speaker.
• The receiver fails to calculate the speakers'
output level and difference of each speaker's
position in distance.
LS+6 SUCCESSFUL RS+6
+1.2m
RESULT
+1.2m
*8
*9
SB+4
+0.6m
In the following cases, set the speakers manually.
• On the display, “SUCCESSFUL” appears, then the setting
values are shown as follows for about 12 seconds:
Ex.:
• When “SILENT” appears twice in succession.
The setting is partially made. (The distance of the speakers
from which sound has not been detected is set to “+9.0m
(+30ft).”)
*7
The receiver exits from Smart Surround Setup.
• When “MANUAL” appears.
The receiver fails to detect the sound three times. The receiver
exits from Smart Surround Setup.
*8
*9
To cancel Smart Surround Setup, press SMART SURROUND
SETUP while “SETTING UP” flashes.
• No other operations can be accepted after “SETTING UP” stops
flashing. Complete the Smart Surround Setup.
R
LS
L
RS
C
SB
To check the current setting made by Smart Surround Setup,
press SMART SURROUND SETUP while the receiver is in
normal operation mode.
*7
Standard channel (the closest speaker).
This speaker position now works as the reference
position (“0m/ft”) and other speakers’ distance is
shown by the difference with this reference speaker
position.
The setting values appear. On the display, the setting values are
shown one after another.
• The current setting is not indicated but “MANUAL” appears if you
change the following settings after using Smart Surround Setup:
– If you change speaker distance manually.
*8
*9
Difference of each speaker position in distance (in
meters or feet).
Each speaker’s output level (–6 to +6).
– If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO.”
To check the current setting, see each setting item of the
speaker distance (see page 22) and the speaker output level
(see page 29).
When finishing to show the setting values,
• If you have not used Smart Surround Setup, “NO S.S.S.”
appears.
On the TV screen, “COMPLETED” appears, then “TEST TONE”
and “END” appear. On the display, “TEST? END?” appears.
• To adjust the speakers’ output levels manually, press TEST
TONE (see page 29).
• To disappear the on-screen display, press SET or any button
except TEST TONE.
• The receiver returns to normal operation mode automatically if
no operations are done for about 10 seconds.
Ex.:
NOTES
• The speaker distance and output level manually set will be
applied instead of those set by using Smart Surround Setup in
the following cases:
– When you change one of the speaker distance (see page 22).
– When you change one of the speaker size either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO”
(see page 21).
• When you want to adjust the speaker distance and output level
manually, see pages 22 and 29.
• When the headphone is in use or “DVD MULTI” is selected as
the source, the receiver returns to normal operation mode
without showing “TEST TONE.”
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L+2
+0.3m
C 0 R+2
STD+0.3m
LS+6
+1.2m
TEST TONE RS+6
END
+1.2m
SB+4
+0.9m
• Do not clap your hands so hard that it may hurt your hands.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic setting items
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.
• You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.
Items and to do
SUBWOOFER (SUBWOOFER)
DUAL MONO (DUAL MONO)
Register your subwoofer. (21)
Select the Dual Mono sound channel. (23)
FRONT SPK (FRONT SPK)
SUBWFR OUT (SUBWFR OUT)
Register your front speaker size. (21)
Select sounds emitted from the subwoofer. (23)
CENTER SPK (CENTER SPK)
CROSSOVER (CROSSOVER)
Register your center speaker size. (21)
Select the cutoff frequency to the subwoofer. (23)
SURR. SPK (SURRND SPK)
LFE ATT (LFE ATT)
Register your surround speaker size. (21)
Attenuate the bass (LFE) sounds. (23)
SURR. BACK SPK (S BACK SPK)
MIDNIGHT (MIDNIGHT)
Register your surround back speaker size. (21)
Reproduce a powerful sound at night. (24)
DISTANCE UNIT (DIST UNIT)
DIGITAL IN 1 (DIGITAL IN1)
Select the measuring unit for the speaker distance. (22)
Select the component connected to the digital coaxial
terminal—1(DVR/DVD). (24)
FL SPK DISTANCE (FRNT L DIST)*
Register the distance from the left front speaker to your
listening point. (22)
DIGITAL IN 2 (DIGITAL IN2)
Select the component connected to the digital optical
terminal—2(VIDEO). (24)
FR SPK DISTANCE (FRNT R DIST)*
Register the distance from the right front speaker to your
listening point. (22)
DIGITAL IN 3 (DIGITAL IN3)
Select the component connected to the digital optical
terminal—3(TV). (24)
C SPK DISTANCE (CENTER DIST)*
Register the distance from the center speaker to your listening DVD VIDEO (DVD VIDEO)
point. (22)
Select the type of video terminal used for the DVD recorder or
DVD player. (25)
LS SPK DISTANCE (SURR L DIST)*
Register the distance from the left surround speaker to your
listening point. (22)
VCR VIDEO (VCR VIDEO)
Select the type of video terminal used for the VCR. (25)
RS SPK DISTANCE (SURR R DIST)*
Register the distance from the right surround speaker to your
listening point. (22)
SUPERIMPOSE (SUPERIMPOSE)
Select to superimpose the menus on the TV screen. (25)
DOWN MIX (DOWN MIX)
SB SPK DISTANCE (S BACK DIST)*
Register the distance from the surround back speaker to your
listening point. (22)
Select to convert S-video signals into composite video signals.
(25)
Y/C SEPARATE (Y/C SEP.)
EX/ES/PLIIx (EX/ES/PLIIx)
Select to convert composite video signals into S-video signals.
(25)
Select the EX/ES/PLIIx reproduction mode. (22)
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.
Operation through on-screen display menus
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.
Menu operation buttons
From the remote control:
On the front panel:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control,
set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Button / JOG
To do
SETTING button show setting item previously selected.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous SETTING MENU.
Button
To do
MULTI JOG
• select a menu or an item.
• change a setting.
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”
5 / ∞ buttons select a menu or an item.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous SETTING MENU.
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu configuration
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)
TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (5)
SETTING MENU (1)
TOP MENU
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
SETTING MENU (1)
SUBWOOFER
5
SUBWOOFER
FRONT SPK
CENTER SPK
SURR. SPK
:
NO
: LARGE
: SMALL
: SMALL
FRONT SPEAKER
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL
∞
CENTER SPEAKER
:ENTER
:EXIT
SURROUND SPEAKER
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (2)
SETTING MENU (2)
DISTANCE UNIT
5
DISTANCE UNIT
:meter
FL SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
FR SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
C SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
LS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
RS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
SB SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
∞
FL SPK DISTANCE
FR SPK DISTANCE
CENTER SPK DISTANCE
LS SPK DISTANCE
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
RS SPK DISTANCE
SB SPK DISTANCE
SETTING MENU (3)
SETTING MENU (3)
5
EX/ES/PL x
DUAL MONO
EX/ES/PL x :
DUAL MONO :
SUBWFR OUT :
CROSSOVER :
AUTO
MAIN
150Hz
0dB
LFE ATT
MIDNIGHT
∞
:
:
SUBWOOFER OUT
CROSSOVER
OFF
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
LFE ATT
MIDNIGHT MODE
SETTING MENU (4)
SETTING MENU (4)
DIGITAL IN 1
DIGITAL IN 2
DIGITAL IN 3
DVD VIDEO INPUT
VCR VIDEO INPUT
5
DIGITAL IN 1: DVR/DVD
DIGITAL IN 2:
DIGITAL IN 3:
DBS
VCR
S/C
S/C
DVD VIDEO
VCR VIDEO
∞
:
:
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (5)
SETTING MENU (5)
SUPERIMPOSE
DOWN MIX
5
SUPERIMPOSE :
ON
OFF
OFF
DOWN MIX
:
Y/C SEPARATE:
∞
Y/C SEPARATE
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (1)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu operating procedure
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.
Ex.:When setting DIGITAL IN 1 terminal.
Operations
On the TV screen
On the display
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
1 To show “TOP MENU,” press MENU.
x
ATT
TOP MENU
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
“SETTING” appears.
:ENTER
:EXIT
“TOP MENU” appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
2 To select “SETTING MENU,” press SET.
x
ATT
SETTING MENU (1)
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SUBWOOFER
FRONT SPK
CENTER SPK
SURR. SPK
:
NO
: LARGE
: SMALL
: SMALL
The submenu previously
selected appears.
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
The setting item previously selected
appears.
3 To select the desired submenu, press
5 or ∞ repeatedly.
There are five screens from “SETTING MENU (1)”
to “SETTING MENU (5).” To change the screen,
simply pressing 5 or ∞ repeatedly.You can go to
the next/previous screen.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
Button indications on the screen
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.
TOP MENU
DIGITAL IN 1
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
:ENTER
:EXIT
23:OPERATE
:BACK
Usable buttons and their functions
Usable buttons and their functions
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
x
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
4 Press SET.
DIGITAL IN 1
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
The current setting of the
selected item appears.
23:OPERATE
:BACK
The selected submenu appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
5 To select the appropriate setting, press
2 or 3 repeatedly, then press SET.
x
ATT
DIGITAL IN 1
HP
MHz
kHz
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
The on-screen display returns to the previous
SETTING MENU. In this example, “SETTING MENU
(4)” appears on the TV screen and “DIGITAL IN1”
appears on the display.
DVR/DVD
TV
DBS
VCR
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press
SET.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items
if necessary.
NOTES
• To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.
• To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press SETTING
when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.
• The setting item previously selected can be shown on the TV screen by pressing SETTING on the front panel when the receiver is in
normal operation mode.
Setting the items
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications on the display, the indications are slightly different from what is shown
on the on-screen display.
This is because of the limited number of characters shown on the display.
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER:YES” is shown as “SUBWFR:YES” on the display.
• “MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF” is shown as “NIGHT: OFF” on the display.
7 Setting the speaker size—FRONT SPEAKER,
CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND SPEAKER,
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER
Setting the speakers
7 Setting subwoofer information—SUBWOOFER
Each time the receiver turns on, the receiver detects the
subwoofer connection and automatically changes the setting of
the subwoofer.
When you want to change the setting manually, select either one
below.
Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.
LARGE
SMALL
NO
Select when the cone speaker size is larger than
12 cm.
Select when the cone speaker size is smaller than
12 cm.
SUBWOOFER:YES
Select when you have connected a subwoofer.
Select when you have disconnected a speaker.
(Not selectable for the front speakers.)
S . WFR
The subwoofer indicator (
) lights up on the display.You
can adjust the subwoofer output level (see page 29).
SUBWOOFER: NO
Initial setting: SMALL for all speakers*
Select when you have disconnected a subwoofer. Selecting
this changes the front speaker size to “LARGE” (see right
column).
* When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO,” the front
speaker size is fixed to “LARGE” (and you cannot select
“SMALL”).
NOTES
NOTE
• If you have selected “SMALL” for the front speaker size, you
cannot select “LARGE” for other speakers.
You need to change the setting each time you turn on the receiver
if you want to change the subwoofer information set automatically.
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
SMALL,” you cannot select “LARGE” for the surround back
speaker.
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
NO,” the surround back speaker is fixed to “NO.”
• If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO,” the
distance manually set will be applied instead of those set by
using Smart Surround Setup.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Setting the speaker distance
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting
—EX/ES/PLIIx
Depending on this setting, available Surround modes for digital
multi-channel software vary—EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel)
reproduction or 5.1-channel reproduction. Select an appropriate
setting for your enjoyment.
• For details about relation between EX/ES/PLIIx setting and
available Surround mode, see page 38.
• To activate the Surround mode, see page 39.
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect
from the Surround/DSP modes.
By referring to the speaker distance, the receiver automatically
sets the delay time of the sound through each speaker so that
sounds through all the speakers can reach you at the same time.
• If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17,
this setting is not required.
7 Measuring unit—DISTANCE UNIT
Select which measuring unit you use.
EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO
According to the incoming signal, an appropriate Surround
mode is applied.
DISTANCE UNIT: meter Select to set the distance in meters.
DISTANCE UNIT: feet
Select to set the distance in feet.
• For Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS-ES software, 6.1-
channel reproduction is applied*.
• For other multi-channel (more than 4 channel) encoded
software, 5.1-channel reproduction is applied.
Initial setting: DISTANCE UNIT: meter
7 Speaker distance—
EX/ES/PLIIx: ON
FL SPK DISTANCE (for the left front speaker),
FR SPK DISTANCE (for the right front speaker),
CENTER SPK DISTANCE (for the center speaker),
LS SPK DISTANCE (for the left surround speaker),
RS SPK DISTANCE (for the right surround speaker),
SB SPK DISTANCE (for the surround back speaker)
Select to apply 6.1-channel reproduction to both 5.1-channel
and 6.1-channel encoded software.
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MOVIE
Select to apply “PLIIx MOVIE” (6.1-channel) reproduction to
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.
Adjustable range: 0.3 m to 9.0 m in 0.3 m intervals
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MUSIC
(1 ft to 30 ft in 1 ft intervals)
Select to apply “PLIIx MUSIC” (6.1-channel) reproduction to
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10 ft) for all speakers
EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF
Select to cancel the EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.
C
R
L
Initial setting: EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO
3.3 m
(11 ft)
3.0 m
(10 ft)
2.7 m
(9 ft)
* For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-
channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied even though
you have selected “EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO.” In this case, select
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”
2.4 m
(8 ft)
From the remote control
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
2.1 m
(7 ft)
LS
RS
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Press EX/ES repeatedly to select an
appropriate setting for your
enjoyment.
SB
In this case, set the distance as follows:
Left front speaker (L):
Right front speaker (R):
Center speaker (C):
“FRONT L: 3.0m (10ft)”
“FRONT R: 3.0m (10ft)”
“CENTER: 3.0m (10ft)”
Left surround speaker (LS): “SURROUND L: 2.7m (9ft)”
Right surround speaker (RS): “SURROUND R: 2.7m (9ft)”
Surround back speaker (SB): “SURROUND BACK: 2.4m (8ft)”
NOTES
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
NO” (see page 21).
– When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source.
• When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK
SPK: NO” (see page 21), the Virtual Surround Back (see page
38) is applied to EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.
NOTES
• You cannot set the speaker distance for the speakers you have
set to “NO.”
• If you change one of these settings manually, the distance
manually set will be applied instead of those set by using Smart
Surround Setup.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the main or sub channel
—DUAL MONO
You can select the playback sound (channel) you want while
playing digital software recorded (or broadcasted) in Dual Mono
mode (see page 36), which includes two monaural channels
separately.
Setting bass sound
7 Setting subwoofer output—SUBWOOFER OUT
You can select the type of the signal which can be transmitted
through the subwoofer. In other words, you can determine
whether or not the bass elements of the front speaker channels
are transmitted through the subwoofer regardless of the front
speaker size setting (either “SMALL” or “LARGE”).
DUAL MONO: MAIN
Select to play back the main channel (Ch 1).*
Signal indicator “L” lights up while playing back this channel.
SUBWFR OUT: LFE
Select to emit only the LFE signals (while playing Dolby
Digital and DTS software) or the bass elements of the
“SMALL” front speakers (while playing any source other than
above).
DUAL MONO: SUB
Select to play back the sub-channel (Ch 2).*
Signal indicator “R” lights up while playing back this channel.
SUBWFR OUT: LFE+MAIN
DUAL MONO: ALL
Select to always emit the bass elements of the front speaker
channels (MAIN). While playing Dolby Digital and DTS
software, the bass elements and the LFE signals are both
emitted.
Select to play back both the main and sub-channels (Ch 1/Ch 2).*
Signal indicators “L” and “R” light up while playing back these
channels.
Initial setting: DUAL MONO: MAIN
Initial setting: SUBWFR OUT: LFE
* Dual Mono signals can be heard from the following speakers—L
(left front speaker), R (right front speaker), and C (center
speaker), with respect to the current Surround setting:
NOTE
When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO” (see page
21), this function is not available.
With Surround Activated
Without
Surround
Center speaker setting
Dual Mono
setting
SMALL/LARGE
NO
7 Setting the crossover frequency—CROSSOVER
L
R
L
C
Ch 1
R
L
R
Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sounds efficiently. If
you use a small speaker in any position, this receiver
automatically reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to
the small speaker to the large speakers.
MAIN
SUB
ALL
Ch 1 Ch 1
Ch 2 Ch 2
Ch 1 Ch 2
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch1
Ch 2
Ch 2
Ch 1+Ch 2
Ch 1+Ch 2 Ch 1+Ch 2
To use this function properly, set this crossover frequency level
according to the size of the small speaker connected.
• If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 21),
this function will not take effect (“CROSSOVER: OFF” appears).
NOTE
The Dual Mono format is not identical with bilingual broadcasting
for TV programs. So this setting does not take effect while
watching such bilingual programs.
CROSSOVER: 80Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 12 cm.
CROSSOVER: 100Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 10 cm.
CROSSOVER: 120Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 8 cm.
CROSSOVER: 150Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 6 cm.
CROSSOVER: 200Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is less than 5 cm.
Initial setting: CROSSOVER: 150Hz
NOTE
Crossover frequency is not valid for the HEADPHONE and 3D
HEADPHONE modes.
7 Setting the low frequency effect attenuator
—LFE ATT
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, set the LFE level to eliminate
distortion.
• This function takes effect only when the LFE signals come in.
LFE ATT: 0dB
Normally select this.
LFE ATT: –10dB Select when the bass sound is distorted.
Initial setting: LFE ATT: 0dB
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Midnight mode
—MIDNIGHT MODE
You can enjoy a powerful sound at night using the Midnight mode.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN)
terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3
When you use the digital input terminals, register what
components are connected to which terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3
(see page 11) so that the correct source name will appear when
you select the digital source.
Select one of the following components for each terminal:
MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF
Select when you want to enjoy surround with its full dynamic
range. (No effect applied.)
DVR/DVD For the DVD player (or DVD recorder).
MIDNIGHT MODE: 1
DBS
VCR
TV
For the DBS tuner.
For the VCR.
For the TV.
Select when you want to reduce the dynamic range a little.
MIDNIGHT MODE: 2
Select when you want to apply the compression effect fully
(useful at night).
Initial setting: DVR/DVD (for “DIGITAL IN 1”)
DBS (for “DIGITAL IN 2”)
Initial setting: MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF
VCR (for “DIGITAL IN 3”)
From the remote control
NOTES
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
• You cannot assign the same component for different terminals.
The priority order for assignment is as follows:
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
“DIGITAL IN 1” > “DIGITAL IN 2” > “DIGITAL IN 3.”
“DIGITAL IN 1” can be set to any component.
Press SOUND, then press MIDNIGHT
repeatedly to select either one of the
above.
Ex.: When “DIGITAL IN 1” is set to “TV.”
DIGITAL IN 1:
TV
NOTE
“DVR/DVD,” “DBS,” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL
IN 2.”
And when “DIGITAL IN 2” is set to “DVR/DVD.”
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
DIGITAL IN 1:
DIGITAL IN 2:
TV
DVR/DVD
“DBS” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL IN 3.”
• Setting “DIGITAL IN 1” affects “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN
3” settings. When you have changed “DIGITAL IN 1,” confirm the
components assigned to “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN 3.”
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the component video input
mode—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO
INPUT
When you use the component video inputs for connecting the
DVD recorder (or DVD player) or VCR, register the type of video
input jacks.
Converting S-video signals into composite
video signals—DOWN MIX
You can select whether or not to convert S-video signals into
composite video signals.
DOWN MIX: ON Select to convert S-video signals into
composite video signals.
If you have not selected appropriate video input jacks, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly (see page 40).
DOWN MIX: OFF Select not to use this function.
Initial setting: DOWN MIX: OFF
For the DVD recorder or DVD player (DVD VIDEO):
NOTES
DVD VIDEO: S/C
• This function is available when satisfying all the following
requirements:
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to
the composite video or S-video input jacks.
– When a video component is connected to this receiver
through at least one of the S-video input terminals.
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this
receiver through at least one of the composite video output
jacks.
DVD VIDEO: COMPONENT
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to
the component video input jacks.
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to
“S/C” (see left column).
Initial setting: DVD VIDEO: S/C
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)
For the VCR (VCR VIDEO):
VCR VIDEO: S/C
Select when connecting the VCR to the composite video or S- Converting composite video signals into S-
video input jacks.
video signals—Y/C SEPARATE
VCR VIDEO: COMPONENT
You can select whether or not to convert composite video signals
Select when connecting the VCR to the component video
come from a video component into S-video signals.
input jacks.
Y/C SEPARATE: ON
Select to convert composite video signals
into S-video signals.
Initial setting: VCR VIDEO: S/C
Y/C SEPARATE: OFF Select not to use this function.
Superimposing the menus
—SUPERIMPOSE
You can select whether or not to superimpose the on-screen
display on the TV screen.
Initial setting: Y/C SEPARATE: OFF
NOTES
• This function is available when satisfying all the following
requirements:
SUPERIMPOSE: ON
– When a video component is connected to this receiver
through at least one of the composite video input jacks.
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this
receiver through at least one of the S-video output terminals.
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to
“S/C” (see left column).
Select to superimpose the on-screen display on the TV
screen.
SUPERIMPOSE: OFF
Select to cancel superimposition. The on-screen display will
be shown on the blue background screen.
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)
Initial setting: SUPERIMPOSE: ON
NOTES
• Some on-screen displays appear on the TV screen regardless
of this setting.
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen when
connecting the TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
jacks (see page 10).
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound adjustments
You can make sound adjustment to your preference after
completing basic setting.
Basic adjustment items
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.
• You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.
Items and to do
SUBWOOFER LEVEL (SUBWFR LVL)
BASS BOOST (BASS BOOST)
Adjust the subwoofer output level. (29)
Boost the bass level. (30)
FRONT L LEVEL (FRONT L LVL)
SUBWFR PHASE (SBWFR PHASE)
Adjust the left front speaker output level. (29)
Select the subwoofer sound phase. (30)
FRONT R LEVEL (FRONT R LVL)
INPUT ATT (INPUT ATT)
Adjust the right front speaker output level. (29)
Attenuate the input level of analog source. (30)
CENTER LEVEL (CENTER LVL)
EFFECT (EFFECT)
Adjust the center speaker output level. (29)
Adjust the effect level. (31)
SURR. L LEVEL (SURR L LVL)
PANORAMA (PANORAMA)
Adjust the left surround speaker output level. (29)
Add wraparound sound effect with side-wall image. (31)
SURR. R LEVEL (SURR R LVL)
CENTER GAIN (CENTER GAIN)
Adjust the right surround speaker output level. (29)
Adjust the sound localization of the center channel. (31)
SURR. BACK LEVEL (S BACK LVL)
CENTER TONE (CENTER TONE)
Adjust the surround back speaker output level. (29)
Make the center tone soft or sharp. (31)
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz (D EQ 63Hz)*
CNTR ALIGNMENT (CNTR ALIGN)
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz (D EQ 250Hz)*
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz (D EQ 1kHz)*
Align the vertical localization of the center channel. (31)
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz (D EQ 4kHz)*
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz (D EQ 16kHz)*
Adjust the equalization pattern of each band. (30)
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.
Operation through on-screen display menus
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.
Menu operation buttons
On the front panel:
From the remote control:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control,
set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Button / JOG
To do
ADJUST button show adjustment item previously selected.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous ADJUST MENU.
Button
To do
MULTI JOG
• select a menu or an item.
• change a setting.
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”
5 / ∞ buttons select a menu or an item.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous ADJUST MENU.
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu configuration
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)
• The “ADJUST MENU (3)” screen cannot be shown depending on the current settings and the connections.
ADJUST MENU (3)
TOP MENU
TOP MENU
ADJUST MENU (1)
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
ADJUST MENU (1)
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
FRONT L LEVEL
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
SURR. L LEVEL
SURR. R LEVEL
:
:
:
:
:
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
:ENTER
:EXIT
SURR. BACK LEVEL :
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SURROUND L LEVEL
SURROUND R LEVEL
SURROUND BACK LEVEL
ADJUST MENU (2)
ADJUST MENU (2)
5
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz
BASS BOOST
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz :
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz :
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz :
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz :
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz :
0
0
0
0
0
BASS BOOST
∞
: OFF
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
ADJUST MENU (3)
ADJUST MENU (3)
SUBWOOFER PHASE
INPUT ATT
EFFECT
5
SUBWFR PHASE : NORMAL
INPUT ATT
EFFECT
: NORMAL
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
0.3
3
PANORAMA
CENTER GAIN
CENTER TONE
CNTR ALIGNMENT:
OFF
∞
PANORAMA
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
CENTER GAIN
CENTER TONE
CENTER ALIGNMENT
ADJUST MENU (1)
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu operating procedure
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.
Ex.:When adjusting subwoofer output level.
Operations
On the TV screen
On the display
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
1 To show “TOP MENU,” press MENU.
Then press 5 or ∞ to select “ADJUST
MENU.”
x
ATT
TOP MENU
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
“SETTING” appears.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
:ENTER
:EXIT
“TOP MENU” appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
2 To select “ADJUST MENU,” press SET.
x
ATT
ADJUST MENU (1)
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
SURR. L LEVEL
SURR. R LEVEL
:
:
:
:
:
The submenu previously
selected appears.
SURR. BACK LEVEL :
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
The adjustment item previously selected
appears.
3 To select the desired submenu, press
5 or ∞ repeatedly.
There are three screens from “ADJUST MENU (1)”
to “ADJUST MENU (3).” To change the screen,
simply pressing 5 or ∞ repeatedly.You can go to
the next/previous screen.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
4 Press SET.
x
ATT
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
HP
MHz
kHz
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
The current setting of the
selected item appears.
23:OPERATE
:BACK
The selected submenu appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
5 To adjust the selected item, press 2 or
3 repeatedly, then press SET.
x
ATT
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
HP
MHz
kHz
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
The on-screen display returns to the previous
ADJUST MENU. In this example, “ADJUST MENU
(1)” appears on the TV screen and “SUBWFR LVL”
appears on the display.
–10
0
+10
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press
SET.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items
if necessary.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
• To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.
• To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote
control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press
ADJUST when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.
• The adjustment item previously selected can be shown on the
TV screen by pressing ADJUST on the front panel when the
receiver is in normal operation mode.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
2
1, 3
Button indications on the screen
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV
screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.
1
Press TEST TONE to check the speakers’ output
balance.
TOP MENU
• On the TV screen, “TEST TONE” appears. The
indicator corresponding to the speaker appears while a
test tone comes out of the speakers.
EX.:
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
TEST TONE
SW+1 L+5 C 0 R-3
:ENTER
:EXIT
LS+5
RS+5
Usable buttons and their functions
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
SB+5
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
• On the display, “TEST L” starts flashing, and a test tone
comes out of the speakers in the following order:
23:OPERATE
:BACK
Usable buttons and their functions
C
R
L
SW
LS
Adjusting the items
RS
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications
on the display, the indications are slightly different from what
is shown on the on-screen display.
This is because of the limited number of characters shown
on the display.
SB
2
Adjust the speaker output levels.
To adjust the left front speaker level (L), press
FRONT L +/–.
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER: +10” is shown as “SUBWFR +10” on
the display.
To adjust the right front speaker level (R), press
FRONT R +/–.
• “BASS BOOST: ON” is shown as “B BOOST ON” on
the display.
To adjust the center speaker level (C), press
CENTER +/–.
To adjust the left surround speaker level (LS), press
SURR L +/–.
Adjusting speaker output level
• SUBWOOFER LEVEL (subwoofer output level),
• FRONT L LEVEL (left front speaker output level),
• FRONT R LEVEL (right front speaker output level),
• CENTER LEVEL (center speaker output level),
• SURROUND L LEVEL (left surround speaker output level),
• SURROUND R LEVEL (right surround speaker output level),
• SURROUND BACK LEVEL (surround back speaker output
level)
To adjust the right surround speaker level (RS), press
SURR R +/–.
To adjust the surround back speaker level (SB), press
S.BACK +/–.
To adjust the subwoofer level (SW), press SUBWFR +/–.
3
Press TEST TONE again to stop the test tone.
You can adjust the speaker output levels.
Adjust all the speakers’ output levels so that you can listen to the
sounds from all the speakers at the same level.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
NOTES
• You can adjust the speaker output levels without the test tone.
• No test tone comes out of the speakers and no speaker
indication appears on the TV screen corresponding to the
speaker which is set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see
page 21).
Adjustable range: –10 (dB) to +10 (dB) (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all speakers
• No test tone is available when the headphone is in use or
“DVD MULTI” is selected.
NOTES
• If you have selected “NO” for a speaker (see page 21), the
output level for the corresponding speaker is not adjustable.
• While using the headphones, you can adjust only the left and
right front speakers’ output level.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the equalization patterns
Adjusting the bass sounds
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz
You can adjust equalization patterns in five frequency bands
(center frequency: 63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz) for the
front speakers.
7 Reinforcing the bass—BASS BOOST
You can boost the bass level—Bass Boost.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
BASS BOOST: ON Select to boost the bass level.
The BASS indicator lights up on the display.
Adjustable range: –8 (dB) to +8 (dB) (in 2 dB intervals)
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all bands
BASS BOOST: OFF Select to deactivate the Bass Boost.
• When adjustment is made, the EQ indicator lights up on the
display.
Initial setting: BASS BOOST: OFF
NOTE
If no adjustment is required, set all the frequency bands to
“0 (dB).”
This function affects only the sound coming out through the front
speakers.
• The EQ indicator goes off from the display.
From the remote control:
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
Before you start, remember...
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
Press SOUND, then press BASS
BOOST repeatedly.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
• Each time you press BASS BOOST, the
Bass Boost turns on and off alternately.
1
2
Press SOUND.
Press EQ FREQ repeatedly to
select the band you want to adjust.
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
3
4
Press EQ LEVEL 9/( to adjust
the equalization pattern of the
selected band.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust
other bands.
2
3
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
1
7 Selecting the subwoofer sound phase—
SUBWOOFER PHASE
You can change the subwoofer sound phase to your preference.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
PHASE: NORMAL
Normally select this.
PHASE: REVERSE Select this when you feel the bass sound is
better with this mode rather than with
“PHASE: NORMAL.”
Initial setting: PHASE: NORMAL
NOTE
This function takes effect only when “SUBWOOFER” is set to
“SUBWOOFER:YES” (see page 21).
7 Attenuating the input signal—INPUT ATT
When the input level of analog source is too high, the sound will
be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
INPUT ATT: ON
Select to attenuate the input signal level.
The ATT indicator lights up on the display.
INPUT ATT: NORMAL Select to deactivate attenuation.
Initial setting: INPUT ATT: NORMAL
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Making the center tone soft or sharp
Adjusting the sound parameters for the
Surround/DSP modes
You can adjust the Surround/DSP sound parameters to your
preference.
—CENTER TONE
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes is
in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.
• This setting is common to all Surround modes, and is
memorized separately for DSP modes.
• For details about the Surround/DSP modes, see pages 34 to 39.
• You cannot adjust the center tone in the following cases:
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21).
– When Dual Mono software is played back.
– While listening with the headphones.
7 Adjusting the effect level for DSP modes
—EFFECT
This setting is available only when one of the DSP modes (except
ALL CH ST) is in use. To activate DSP mode, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
DSP mode.
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: CENTER TONE: 3
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: EFFECT: 3
As the number increases, the dialogue becomes stronger.
Normally, select “3.”
• When the center tone is set to other than “CENTER TONE: 3,”
the C.TONE indicator lights up on the display.
As the number increases, the effect becomes stronger.
Normally, select “3.”
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Press SOUND, then press C.TONE
repeatedly.
Press SOUND, then press EFFECT
repeatedly.
NOTE
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
7 Align the vertical localization of the center
7 Adjusting the panorama control for Pro Logic II
channel —CENTER ALIGNMENT
Music—PANORAMA
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes
(except “PLII MUSIC,” “PLIIx MUSIC,” “Neo:6 MUSIC,” and “ALL
CH ST”) is in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
Surround/DSP mode.
This setting is available only when Pro Logic II Music is in use. To
activate Pro Logic II Music, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you
change the setting.
• You cannot adjust the center alignment in the following cases:
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21).
PANORAMA: ON
Select to add “wraparound” sound effect with
side-wall image.
– When Dual Mono software is played back.
– While listening with the headphones.
PANORAMA: OFF Select to listen to originally recorded sound.
Initial setting: PANORAMA: OFF
C ALIGNMENT: ON Select when you cannot feel as if the actors
or singers are speaking or singing on the
screen.
7 Adjusting the sound localization of the center
C ALIGNMENT: OFF Select not to use this function.
channel—CENTER GAIN
Initial setting: C ALIGNMENT: OFF
This setting is available only when Neo:6 Music is in use.
• If you have set “CENTER SPEAKER” to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21), the center gain is not adjustable.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you
change the setting.
Adjustable range: 0 to 1.0 (in 0.1 step intervals)
Initial setting: CENTER GAIN: 0.3
As the number increases, the center channel will be localized
clearly.
Normally, select “0.3.”
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuning in to stations manually
From the remote control ONLY:
Tuner operations
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates
between “FM” and “AM.”
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
Tuner operations are mainly done from the remote control.
2 Press repeatedly or hold TUNING 9 or
( TUNING until the station you want is tuned
in.
• Pressing (or holding) TUNING 9 increases the frequency.
• Pressing (or holding) ( TUNING decreases the frequency.
NOTES
• When you hold and release TUNING 9 or ( TUNING, the
frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in.
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the
TUNED indicator lights up on the display.
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST (stereo)
indicator also lights up.
When operating the
receiver using the remote
control, set the mode
selector to “AUDIO/TV/
VCR/DBS.”
Using preset tuning
Once a station is assigned a channel number, the station can be
quickly tuned simply by selecting the number.You can preset up to
30 FM and 15 AM stations.
To store the preset stations
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
NOTE
When you have selected “FM” or “AM” by using SOURCE
SELECTOR on the front panel, the remote control may not
work for tuner operations. To use the remote control for tuner
operations, select “FM” or “AM” by using the source selecting
button on the remote control.
From the remote control ONLY:
1 Tune in to the station you want to preset (see
“Tuning in to stations manually” above).
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the
FM reception mode” on page 33.
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other
countries use 10 kHz spacing. 9 kHz interval spacing is the initial
setting.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
ATT
HP
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
MHz
kHz
• Be sure the receiver is turned off, but is plugged into an AC
outlet when setting the AM tuner interval.
2 Press MEMORY.
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for
about 5 seconds.
On the front panel ONLY:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
To select the 10 kHz interval:
Hold down ADJUST and press
STANDBY/ON.
“10k STEP” appears on the display.
To change back to the 9 kHz interval:
Hold down SETTING and press
“9k STEP” appears on the display.
STANDBY/ON.
NOTE
When you change the AM tuner interval spacing, stored preset
stations are erased. In this case, restore stations.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to
select a channel number while the channel
number position is flashing.
On the front panel:
2 1, 3
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
Before you start, remember...
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
1 Turn SOURCE SELECTOR to select “FM” or
“AM.”
4 Press MEMORY again while the selected
channel number is flashing on the display.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.
The selected channel number stops flashing.
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.
2 PressTUNER PRESET.
“P” appears on the display and MULTI JOG now works for
selecting preset channels.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the
stations you want.
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select a preset channel
To erase a stored preset station
number while “P” appears on the display.
Storing a new station on a used channel number erases the
previously stored one.
• To increase the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG
clockwise.
• To decreases the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG
counterclockwise.
To tune in a preset station
From the remote control:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in and
the numeric buttons now work for tuner operations.
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates
between “FM” and “AM.”
Selecting the FM reception mode
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.
• You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station
(see page 32).
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
2 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to
From the remote control ONLY:
select a preset channel number.
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode
alternates between “AUTO MUTING” and “MONO.”
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO MUTING
Normally select this.
When a program is broadcast in stereo,
you will hear stereo sound; when in
monaural, you will hear monaural sound.
This mode is also useful to suppress
static noise between stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator lights up on the display.
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
MONO
Select this to improve the reception (but
stereo effect will be lost).
In this mode, you will hear noise while
tuning in to the stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator goes off from the
display. (The ST indicator also goes off.)
Initial setting: AUTO MUTING
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introducing the Surround modes
■ Dolby Digital*
Dolby Digital is a digital signal compression method, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, and enables multi-channel encoding and
decoding.
Creating realistic
sound fields
• When Dolby Digital signal is detected through the digital input,
the DOLBY D indicator lights up on the display.
Dolby Digital 5.1CH
Dolby Digital 5.1CH (DOLBY D) encoding method records and
digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel,
center channel, left surround channel, right surround channel, and
LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but the LFE channel is
counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel).
Dolby Digital enables stereo surround sounds, and sets the cutoff
frequency of the surround treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for
Dolby Pro Logic. As such, the sound movement and “being-there”
feeling are enhanced much more than Dolby Pro Logic.
Reproducing theater ambience
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to
reproduce impressive multi-channel sound, reaching you from all
directions.
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound
movement can be expressed.
Surround/DSP modes built in this receiver can create almost the
same Surround sound as you can feel in a real movie theater.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) is a digital surround encoding
format that adds the third surround channels, called “surround
back.”
Compared to the conventional Dolby Digital 5.1CH, these newly
added surround back channels can reproduce more detailed
movements behind you while viewing the video software. In
addition, surround sound localization will become more stable.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Dolby Surround
■ DTS**
DTS is another digital signal compression method, developed by
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., and enables multi-channel
encoding and decoding (1ch up to 6.1ch).
• When DTS signal is detected through the digital input, the DTS
indicator lights up on the display.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is a multi-channel playback format to convert
2-channel software into 5-channel (plus subwoofer). The matrix-
based conversion method used for Dolby Pro Logic II makes no
limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and
enables stereo surround sound.
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic II modes—
Pro Logic II Movie (PLII MOVIE) and Pro Logic II Music (PLII
MUSIC).
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete 5.1 channel
digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.
Compared to Dolby Digital, the DTS Digital Surround format has a
lower audio compression rate which enables it to add breadth and
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround
features natural, solid, and clear sound.
When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the
up on the display.
indicator lights
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded
software.You can enjoy a sound field very close
to the one created with discrete 5.1-channel
sounds.
DTS Extended Surround (DTS-ES)
Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo
DTS-ES is another multi-channel digital encoding format.
It greatly improves the 360-degree surround impression and
space expression by adding the third surround channel—surround
back channel.
software.You can enjoy wide and deep sounds.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DTS-ES includes two signal formats with different surround signal
recording methods—DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch (ES DISCRETE)
and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch (ES MATRIX).
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch has been designed to encode (and
decode) a 6.1-channel signal discretely to avoid interference with
each channel.
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch has been designed to add an extra
surround channel to DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel. By using a
matrix encoding/decoding method, an additional “surround back”
channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right
surround channel signals.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a newly introduced multi-channel playback
format to convert not only multi-channel software but 2-channel
software into 6.1 channel (or 7.1 channel) that developed from
Dolby Pro Logic II. The matrix-based conversion method used for
Dolby Pro Logic IIx makes no limitation for the cutoff frequency of
the surround treble.
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes—
Pro Logic IIx Movie (PLIIx MOVIE) and Pro Logic IIx Music
(PLIIx MUSIC).
When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is activated, the
lights up on the display.
indicator
** “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
PLIIx MOVIE Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded
software.You can enjoy a sound field with a
natural wraparound effect.
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
PLIIx MUSIC Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo
software.You can enjoy wide and deep 6.1-
channel sounds.
• To enjoy software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the
source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this
receiver. (See page 11.)
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using Surround mode, the sounds come out of the
activated speakers which the Surround mode requires.
DTS 96/24
In recent years, there has been increasing interest in higher
sampling rates both for recording and for reproducing at home.
Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency range and greater bit
depths provide extended dynamic range.
DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format (fs 96 kHz/24
bits) introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc. to deliver “better-
than-CD sound quality” into the home.
• When DTS 96/24 signal is detected, the DTS and 96/24
indicators light up.You can enjoy its 5.1-channel sound with full-
quality.
• If either the surround speakers or center speaker is set to
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), the corresponding
channel signals are allocated to and emitted through the front
speakers.
• If both the surround speakers and center speaker are set to
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-
PHONIC processing (which has been developed to create the
surround effect through the front speakers only) is used. The 3D
indicator lights up on the display.
3D HEADPHONE mode
DTS Neo:6
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the Surround
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated
without respect to the type of software played back.
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,
and HP indicators light up.
DTS Neo:6 is another conversion method to create 6-channel
(plus subwoofer) from analog/digital 2-channel software by using
the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix
6.1ch.
• This receiver provides the following DTS Neo:6 modes—Neo:6
Cinema (NEO:6CINEMA) and Neo:6 Music (NEO:6 MUSIC).
When one of them is activated, the NEO:6 indicator lights up on
the display.
About other digital signals
Linear PCM
NEO:6CINEMA Suitable for playing movies.You can get the
same atmosphere with 2-channel software as
with 6.1-channel software. It is also effective for
playing software encoded with conventional
surround formats.
Uncompressed digital audio data used for DVDs, CDs, and
Video CDs.
DVDs support 2 channels with sampling rates of 48/96 kHz, at
quantization of 16/20/24 bits. On the other hand, CDs and
Video CDs are limited to 2 channels with 44.1 kHz at 16 bits.
• When Linear PCM signal is detected, the LPCM indicator
lights up.
NEO:6 MUSIC Suitable for playing music software. The front
channel signals bypass the decoder (resulting in
no loss of sound quality) and the surround
signals transmitted through the other speakers
expand the sound field naturally.
Dual Mono
Dual Mono can be easily understood when you think of the
bilingual broadcast for TV programs (however, the Dual Mono
format is not identical with those analog formats).
This format is now adopted in Dolby Digital, DTS, and so on. It
allows two independent channels (called main channel and
sub-channel) to be recorded separately.
• You can select either channel you want to listen to (see
page 23).
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using the DAP mode, the sounds come out of all the
connected and activated speakers.
Introducing the DSP modes
• If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing
(which has been developed to create the surround effect
through the front speakers only) is used.
The sound heard in a concert hall, club, etc. consists of direct
sound and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from
behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any
reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the
distances of the ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and
indirect sounds are the most important elements of the acoustic
surround effects.
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.
■ MONO FILM
The DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes can create these
important elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling.
In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening
room while viewing monaural sound video software (analog and
2-channel digital signals including Dual Mono signal), you can use
this mode.
The surround effect will be added, and the sound localization of
actor’s words will be improved.
Reflections from behind
Early reflections
This mode cannot be used for multi-channel digital signals.
When “MONO FILM” is used, sounds come out of all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
• If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing
(which has been developed to create the surround effect
through the front speakers only) is used.
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.
• If incoming signals change from 2-channel digital signal to
another digital signal type, “MONO FILM” is canceled and an
appropriate Surround mode is activated.
Direct sounds
The DSP modes include the following modes:
• Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes—HALL1, HALL2, LIVE
CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2
• MONO FILM—Used for all types of 2-channel signals (including
Dual Mono signal)
■ All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
• All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)
This mode cannot be used if the surround speakers are set
to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).
When one of the DSP modes is activated, the DSP indicator lights
up on the display.
■ Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes
You can use the following DAP modes in order to reproduce a
more acoustic sound field in your listening room.
HALL1
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large
shoebox-shaped hall designed primarily for
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about
2000.)
Sound reproduced from
normal stereo
Sound reproduced from All
Channel Stereo mode
HALL2
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large
vineyard-shaped hall designed primarily for
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about
2000.)
3D HEADPHONE mode
LIVE CLUB
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a live music club
with a low ceiling.
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the DSP
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated
without respect to the type of software played back.
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,
and HP indicators light up.
DANCE CLUB Reproduces the spatial feeling of a rocking dance
club.
PAVILION
THEATER1
THEATER2
Reproduces the spatial feeling of an exhibition
hall with a high ceiling.
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large theater
where the seating capacity is about 600.
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a small theater
where the seating capacity is about 300.
NOTE
When “THEATER1” or “THEATER2” is activated while playing
back 2-channel analog or digital source, the built-in Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder is activated and the
indicator lights up.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Surround/DSP modes
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the speaker settings and the incoming signals. See the table below.
• The numbers inside the parentheses following the incoming signal type indicate the number of the front channels and that of the
surround channels. For example, (3/2) indicates that the signals are encoded with three front signals (left/right/center) and two (stereo)
surround signals.
• For EX/ES/PLIIx setting, see page 22.
The name of the mode shown below is the display indication.
EX/ES/PLIIx setting
Incoming Signal Type
AUTO
ON
PLIIx MOVIE
PLIIx MUSIC
OFF
Dolby Digital Surround EX
DOLBY D EX*2*5
DOLBY D EX*2
DOLBY D EX*2*3
D + PLIIx MU*2
DOLBY D
Dolby Digital (3/2, 2/2)
Dolby Digital (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)
Dolby Digital (Dual Mono)
DTS-ES Discrete*1
DOLBY D
DOLBY D EX*2
DOLBY D EX*2*3
DOLBY D
D + PLIIx MU*2
DOLBY D
DUAL MONO
ES DISCRETE*2 ES DISCRETE*2
DTS +
DTS +
DTS +
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
DTS
DTS
DTS
DTS-ES Matrix*1
ES MATRIX*2
DTS
ES MATRIX*2
DTS (3/2, 2/2)*1
DTS + NEO:6*2
DTS (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)
DTS (Dual Mono)
DTS
DUAL MONO
Dolby Digital (2/0)
DTS (2/0)
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
NEO:6CINEMA
NEO:6 MUSIC
PLIIx MOVIE*4/PLIIx MUSIC*4/NEO:6CINEMA/NEO:6 MUSIC
Lenear PCM
Analog
DVD MULTI
None
*1 DTS 96/24 processing is not applied when the EX/ES/PLIIx setting is activated. If you want to apply the processing, set the EX/ES/
PLIIx setting to “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” (see page 22).
*2 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), Virtual Surround Back is activated for the
modes.
*3 When using PLIIx Movie to reproduce Dolby Digital or DTS software, this receiver applies Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) or DTS plus
Dolby Digital EX (DTS +
EX) processing (6.1-channel reproduction) to the software.
*4 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), “PLIIx MOVIE” is changed to “PLII MOVIE”
and “PLIIx MUSIC” is changed to “PLII MUSIC.”
*5 For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied. In this case, select
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”
About the DSP modes
• The following DSP modes are available regardless of incoming signal type:
HALL1, HALL2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2
• When an incoming signal is a multi-channel (more than 2-channel) digital signal, “MONO FILM” is not available.
• You cannot select “ALL CH ST” when the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).
Virtual Surround Back
This function creates the great surround effect from the behind as if you have connected the surround back speaker. The VIRTUAL
SB (Surround Back) indicator lights up on the display.
If you have connected (and activated) the surround speakers, you can use Virtual Surround Back without connecting the surround
back speaker.
Virtual Surround Back is activated when “EX/ES/PLIIx” is set to other than “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” and when playing back the software
including the following signals:
– Dolby Digital Surround EX
– DTS-ES
– Dolby Digital or DTS with more than 4-channels
Virtual Surround Back is activated when one of the Surround modes is selected.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the front panel:
2
Activating the Surround/DSP modes
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the incoming
1, 3
signals. For details, see page 38.
Activating one of the Surround/DSP modes automatically
recalls the memorized settings and adjustments.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
• To adjust the speaker output level, see page 29.
• To adjust the effect level for the DSP mode (except All
Channel Stereo mode,) see page 31.
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD
MULTI.”
• To add “wraparound” sound effect to “PLII MUSIC”
(PANORAMA control,) see page 31.
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or
digital) correctly.
• To adjust the sound localization of the center channel
for “NEO:6 MUSIC” (center gain,) see page 31.
2 Press SURROUND.
• To adjust the vertical localization of the center channel
for Surround/DSP modes (except “PLII MUSIC,”“PLIIx
MUSIC,”“Neo6: MUSIC,” and “ALL CH ST”) (center
alignment,) see page 31.
MULTI JOG now works for selecting Surround/DSP modes.
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select the Surround/DSP
mode you want.
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-
channel software:
NOTES
• You cannot use any Surround/DSP modes when selecting “DVD
MULTI” as the playback source.
• The on-screen display appears on the TV screen to show the
Surround/DSP mode name for 5 seconds when you select the
Surround/DSP mode.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO SURR
HALL1
Surround modes*
HALL2
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to
“SUPERIMPOSE: OFF” (see page 25).
LIVE CLUB
PAVILION
THEATER2
ALL CH ST
(Back to the beginning)
DANCE CLUB
THEATER1
MONO FILM
SURR OFF
From the remote control:
1
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set the
mode selector to
To cancel Surround/DSP modes
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Turn MULTI JOG so that “SURR OFF” appears on the display.
NOTE
The initial setting is “AUTO SURR.”
* Available Surround modes vary depending on the incoming
signals. For details, see “Using the Surround/DSP modes” on
page 38.
2
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD
When you select “AUTO SURR” (Auto Surround)
You can enjoy the Surround mode easily.
MULTI.”
• For details about the Surround modes, see pages 34 to 36.
• When “AUTO SURR” is activated, the AUTO SR indicator lights
up on the display.
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or
digital) correctly.
2 Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the
How does “AUTO SURR” work?
Surround/DSP mode you want.
• If a multi-channel signal comes in, an appropriate Surround
mode will be selected automatically.
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-
channel software:
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal with
surround signal comes in, “PLII MOVIE” will be selected.
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal without
surround signal, or a Linear PCM signal comes in, “SURR
OFF (stereo)” will be selected.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO SURR
HALL1
Surround modes*
HALL2
NOTES
LIVE CLUB
PAVILION
THEATER2
ALL CH ST
(Back to the beginning)
DANCE CLUB
THEATER1
MONO FILM
SURR OFF
• “AUTO SURR” does not take effect in the following cases:
– While playing an analog source.
– While selecting one of the fixed digital decode modes—
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” (see page 13).
• While listening with the headphones, the 3D HEADPHONE
mode (see pages 36 and 37) is activated without respect to the
type of software played back.
To cancel Surround/DSP modes
• When “AUTO SURR” is selected, sound may not come out at
the beginning of playback. If it occurs, select a Surround mode
manually.
Press SURROUND repeatedly so that “SURR OFF” appears on
the display.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections 2: Video cable connection
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—
composite video, S-video, and component video, and the signals
coming into this receiver through one type of video terminals can
output only through the terminal of the same type. So you need to
connect the video components to this receiver using one of the
following three ways.
• When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set
the video input for the DVD player and the VCR correctly (see
“Selecting the component video input mode—DVD VIDEO
INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT” on page 25); otherwise, the correct
input for this receiver will not be selected on the TV.
AV COMPU LINK
remote control
system
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to
operate JVC’s video components (TV, DVD player*, and VCR)
through this receiver.
Case 1*:
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the S-video terminals, connect this receiver to the
TV’s video input 1 terminal using S-video cables.
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which has
added a function to operate JVC’s video components through the
component video jacks. To use this remote control system, you
need to connect the video components you want to operate,
following the diagrams below and the procedures on page 41.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components.
S-video cable
S-video cable
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
* “DVD player” on pages 40 and 41 can be replaced with “DVD
recorder.”
To video input 1
Connections 1: AV COMPU LINK connection
Case 2*:
TV
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the composite video jacks, connect this receiver
to the TV’s video input 2 terminal (composite video input)
using composite video cables.
AV
AV
COMPU LINK-III
COMPU LINK EX
Composite video cable
Composite video cable
Monaural mini-plugs
(not supplied)
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
To video input 2
(Composite)
AV
COMPU
LINK-III
Case 3:
220V
110V
127V
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the component video jacks, connect this receiver
to the TV’s video input 2 terminals (component video
input) using component video cables.
230 -
240V
Component video cable
Component video cable
Monaural
mini-plugs
(not supplied)
AV
COMPU LINK
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
To video input 2
(Component)
DVD player
AV
COMPU LINK
* When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set
“DOWN MIX” and “Y/C SEPARATE” to “OFF”; otherwise, this
system does not work correctly. For details about each setting,
see page 25.
VCR
IMPORTANT:
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the
DBS tuner connected to the DBS IN jacks.
NOTES
• When connecting the receiver and aTV with the AV COMPU LINK
EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode (see page 41).
• When connecting only the VCR and DVD player to this receiver,
connect it directly to the receiver using cable with the monaural
mini-plugs.
• You can connect only the TV with AV COMPU LINK EX or AV
COMPU LINK-III terminal to the AV COMPU LINK-III terminal.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-touch DVD play
Connecting procedure
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input
jacks on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to
“DVR/DVD” or “DVD MULTI.”
1 If you have already plugged your VCR, DVD
player,TV, and this receiver into the AC
outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to
“DVR/DVD DGT.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
2 Connect your VCR, DVD player,TV, and this
receiver as follows, using the cables with the
monaural mini-plugs (not supplied).
• See “Connections 1” on the previous page.
3 Connect the audio input/output jacks on the
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using
the audio cables.
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode
• When you select “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL”) as the source to play on
the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to
the TV tuner so that you can watch TV.
• When you select “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD DGT”), “DVD
MULTI,” “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”), or “DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL”)
as the source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically
changes the input mode to the appropriate position (either video
input 1 or video input 2) so that you can view the playback
picture.
• See pages 7 to 10.
4 Connect the video input/output jacks on the
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using
the S-video cables, composite video cables,
or component video cables.
• See “Connections 2” on the previous page.
5 Plug the AC power cords of the connected
components and this receiver into the AC
outlets.
NOTE
This function does not work when you connect this receiver and
the TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal using a component
video cable. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to Case 1 or
Case 2 on page 40.
6 When turning on the TV for the first time after
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV
volume to the minimum using the TV volume
control on the TV.
Automatic power on/off
The TV, DVD player, and VCR turn on and off along with the
receiver.
7 Turn on other connected components first,
then turn on this receiver.
When you turn on the receiver;
• If the previously selected source is “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL”) or
“DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL”), only the TV will turn on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD
DGT”) or “DVD MULTI,” the TV and DVD player will turn on
automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”),
the TV and VCR will turn on automatically.
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, DVD player, and VCR will
turn off.
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied
with this receiver (press VCR
).
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use
the five basic functions listed below.
Remote control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR using this
remote control
See pages 42 and 43 for details.
NOTE
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each
component.
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR, the VCR
will not turn off, but continue recording.
One-touch video play
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the
VCR, you can enjoy the video playback without setting other
switches manually. The receiver automatically turns on and
changes the source to “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”).
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the
play (3) button on the VCR or on the remote control. So, you can
get the same result.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 VCR
Operating other
JVC products
Set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
You can use the supplied remote control to operate not only
this receiver but also other JVC products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.
Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals—
remote codes “A” and “B.”
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to
“A,” set the manufacturer’s code to “01.”
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to
“B,” set the manufacturer’s code to “02.”
The initial setting is “01.” For details about the setting, see
“Changing the transmittable signals for operating a VCR” on
page 45.
• To operate other products, aim the remote control directly at the
remote sensor on the target product.
You can always perform the following operation:
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.
:
7 TV
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations on
the VCR.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers on the VCR.
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.
Start playback.
1 – 9, 0:
3:
Set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.
Fast-wind a tape.
¡:
1:
Rewind a tape.
REC PAUSE:
Enter recording pause. To start recording,
press this button then 3.
7 DVD recorder or DVD player
To operate the DVD
recorder, set the mode
selector to “DVR.”
You can always perform the following operations:
To operate the DVD player,
set the mode selector to
“DVD.”
TV
:
Turn on or off the TV.
TV VOL +/–:
TV/VIDEO:
Adjust the volume on the TV.
Change the input mode (either video input
or TV tuner) on the TV.
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on the
TV.
CHANNEL +/–:
1 – 9, 0, 100+:
Change the channel numbers.
Select the channel numbers.
TV RETURN (10): Function as the TV RETURN button.
(Switches between the previous channel
and the current channel.)
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After setting the mode selector correctly, you can perform the
following operations on the DVD recorder or DVD player.
For various playback:
(one touch replay):
See the instructions supplied with the DVD recorder or DVD
player for details.
Move the playback position back 10 seconds
before the current position.
RETURN:
CANCEL:
Return to the main menu during menu
operation.
7 Changing the remote control code for DVD
recorder
Cancel the programmed track, etc.
Some JVC DVD recorders can accept four types of the control
signals.You can assign one of the four codes to the remote
control supplied with this receiver for operating your DVD
recorder. For details, refer to the manual supplied with the
DVD recorder.
Only for DVD recorder operations:
CHANNEL +/–: Change the channel numbers.
Initial setting: 03
DVD/HDD:
Select the DVD recorder or HDD deck. (Only for
a DVD recorder incorporated with HDD deck.)
1 Set the mode selector to “DVR.”
(skip):
Move the playback position ahead 30 seconds
after the current position.
2 Press and hold DVR/DVD
3 Press DVR/DVD.
.
1 – 9, 0:
Select a channel number (while stopped) or a
chapter/title number, track number (while playing
back). Press ENTER to enter the number.
4 Enter the remote control code you want using
buttons 1 – 4, and 0.
REC MODE:
REC PAUSE:
Select the recording mode.
EX.: To enter the code “2”, press 0, then 2.
Enter recording pause. To start recording,
press 3.
Code for DVR
Number to enter
1
2
3
4
01
02
03
04
DISPLAY:
Change the display information.
Only for DVD player operations:
5 Release DVR/DVD
.
fs/Rate*:
Show the sampling frequency.
Now, the remote control code has been changed.
TITLE/GROUP: Make the numeric buttons work for selecting the
title/group number.
You can always perform the following operation:
ZOOM:
Zoom in and out.
DVR/DVD
3:
:
Turn on or off the DVD recorder or DVD player.
Start playback.
1 – 10, 0, +10: Select a chapter/title number, track number,
menu item, etc.
DVD/CARD:
Select the disc or memory card to play. (Only for
a DVD player incorporated with memory card
slots.)
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.
¢:
4:
DIMMER:
THUMBNAIL:
SLIDE:
Change the display brightness.
Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) chapter.
Show the thumbnail screen for JPEG discs.
Start the slide show playback for JPEG discs.
¡:
1:
Fast-forward playback.
Fast-reverse playback.
3D/S.EFFECT: Apply the 3D effect.
PAGE: Show browsable still pictures on DVD Audio
discs.
TOP MENU/MENU:
Display the menu recorded on discs.
* Press and hold when using these buttons.
ON SCREEN:
5/∞/3/2:
ENTER:
Shows the on-screen bar.
Select an item on the menu screen.
Enter the selected item, channel number,
chapter/title number, or track number (if
required).
If these buttons do not function normally, use the remote
control supplied with your DVD recorder or DVD player.
Refer also to the manuals supplied with the DVD recorder
or DVD player for details.
You can also use the following buttons to operate JVC DVD
recorder and/or DVD player if it supports the corresponding
function:
For various settings:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
SET UP:
VFP:
Select the audio language/channel.
Select the subtitle language.
Display the Preference display.
Show the picture adjustment screen.
PROGRESSIVE*: Change the scanning mode.
ANGLE: Select the view angle.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturers’ codes for TV
Manufacturer
Codes
Operating other
manufacturers’
products
JVC
Akai
01
02
03
04
05
Bell+Howell
Centurion
Coronad
Daewoo
Emerson
Fisher
06, 07, 08
09, 10, 11, 12, 13
14
GE•Pana
GE•RCA
Gold Star
Hitachi
15, 16
17
18, 19
20, 21
22, 23
24
25
25
By changing the transmittable signals, you can use the
supplied remote control to operate other manufacturers’
products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.
• To operate those components with the remote control, first you
need to set the manufacturers’ codes each for the TV, VCR, and
DBS.
• After replacing batteries of the remote control, set the
manufacturers’ codes again.
KTV
Magnavox
Marantz
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
Philips
26, 27
24
Pioneer
Proscan
Quasar
Radioshack
RCA
28
29
30
31
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a TV
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
02, 17, 32, 33, 34, 35
Samsung
Sanyo
Sears
36, 37
14
38
1 Press and hold TV
2 Press TV.
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
Sharp
Sony
39
40
1 – 9, and 0.
Symphonic
Toshiba
Zenith
41, 42
38
43, 44
See “Manufacturers’ codes for TV” on the right.
4 Release TV
.
Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV.
Initial setting: 01
TV
:
Turn on or off the TV.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
TV VOL +/–:
TV/VIDEO:
Adjust the volume on the TV.
Change the input mode (either TV or
VIDEO).
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on
the TV.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers.
Select the channel numbers.
1 – 9, 0, 100+ (+10):
See the instructions supplied with the TV for details.
5 Try to operate your TV by pressing TV
.
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of TV, try each
one until the correct one is entered.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturers’ codes for VCR
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a VCR
Manufacturer
JVC
Codes
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
01, 02, 03, 04
1 Press and hold VCR
2 Press VCR.
.
Aiwa
Akai
Bell+Howell
Daewoo
Emerson
Fisher
05
06, 07, 08
09
10
11, 12, 13, 14, 15
16, 17, 18, 19
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
1 – 9, and 0.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for VCR” on the right.
G.E.
20, 21
22
23
24
25
20, 26
4 Release VCR
.
Go Video
Gold Star
Go-Video A
Go-Video B
Hitachi
Now, you can perform the following operation on the VCR.
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.
:
Magnavox
Mitsubishi
NEC
27, 28, 29
30, 31, 32, 33
34, 35
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations
on the VCR.
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
Samsung
Sanyo
Scott
Sharp
Shintom
Sony
Symphonic
Teknica
Toshiba
Zenith
36, 37
27
38
39, 40, 41
16, 17, 18, 19
42
43, 44
45
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51
52
53, 54
55
56
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers on the
VCR.
1 – 9, 0:
3:
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.
Start playback.
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback.
¡:
1:
Fast-wind a tape.
Rewind a tape.
See the instructions supplied with the VCR for details.
5 Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR
.
Initial setting: 01
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of VCR, try each
one until the correct one is entered.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a DVD player
a DBS tuner
Set the mode selector to “DVD.”
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
1 Press and hold DVR/DVD
2 Press DVR/DVD.
.
1 Press and hold DBS
2 Press DBS.
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
1 – 9, and 0.
1 – 9, and 0.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player” below.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner” below.
4 Release DVR/DVD
.
4 Release DBS
.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DVD
player.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DBS
tuner.
DVR/DVD
:
Turn on or off the DVD player.
DBS
:
Turn on or off the DBS tuner.
3:
Start playback.
After pressing DBS, you can perform the following operations
on the DBS tuner.
1:
Return to the beginning of the current
chapter (or fast-forward for some models).
¡:
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter
(or fast-reverse for some models).
CHANNEL +/–:
1 – 9, 0:
Change the channel numbers on the
DBS tuner.
7:
Stop playback.
Select the channel numbers on the
DBS tuner.
8:
Pause playback.
MENU:
Display the menu recorded on DVD
VIDEO discs.
See the instructions supplied with the DBS tuner for details.
5/∞/3/2:
ENTER:
1 – 9, 0:
Select an item on the menu screen.
Enter the selected item.
5 Try to operate your DBS tuner by pressing
DBS
.
When your DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the
correct code.
Select the chapter number.
See the instructions supplied with the DVD player for details.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DBS tuner,
try each one until the correct one is entered.
5 Try to operate your DVD player by pressing
DVR/DVD
.
Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner
When your DVD player turns on or off, you have entered the
correct code.
Manufacturer
Codes
Echostar
G.I.
40
01, 41
02
03, 04, 05, 06
42
43
07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15
16, 17, 18
19
20, 21, 22
23, 24, 44
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
31, 32
45
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DVD player,
try each one until the correct one is entered.
Gemini
Hamlin
Hitachi
Hughes
Jerrold
Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player
Manufacturer
JVC
Hitachi
Codes
01
12
Macom
Magnavox
Oak
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Primestar
RCA
S. Atlanta
Samsung
Sony
Kenwood
Mitsubishi
Onkyo
Panasonic
Philips
05, 08
10
15, 16
04
07
Pioneer
Samsung
Sony
03
14
02
46
33, 34, 35
36
Toshiba
Yamaha
06
09
47
Tocom
Toshiba
Zenith
37
48
38, 39
Initial setting: 01
NOTE
You cannot use this remote control to operate other
manufacturers’ DVD recorder.
Initial setting: 01
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If
there are any problems you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s
service center.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The power cord is not plugged in.
SOLUTION
The power does not come on.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
The receiver turns off (enters standby
mode).
Speakers are overloaded because of high
volume.
1. Stop the playback source.
2. Turn on the receiver again, then turn the
volume down.
Speakers are overloaded because of a
short circuit at the speaker terminals.
Check the speaker wiring. If speaker wiring
is not short-circuited, contact your dealer.
The receiver is overloaded because of a
high voltage.
Consult your dealer after unplugging the
power cord.
“OVER HEAT” flashes on the display,
then the receiver turns off.
The receiver is overloaded because of high Turn on the receiver again. If the receiver
volume or long time usage.
turns off soon, consult your dealer after
unplugging the power cord.
No sound from speakers.
Speaker signal cables are not connected.
Check speaker wiring, then reconnect if
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging
the power cord.
Connections are incorrect.
Check the audio connections (see pages 7
to 11) after unplugging the power cord.
An incorrect source is selected.
Muting is activated.
Select the correct source.
Press MUTING to cancel the mute (see
page 15).
An incorrect input mode (analog or digital)
is selected.
Select the correct input mode (analog or
digital).
TV Direct is activated.
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).
Sound from one speaker only.
Speaker signal cables are not connected
properly.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging
the power cord.
Bass sound is reinforced too much
when listening in stereo.
Appropriate bass level is not selected.
The sounds may be intermittently distorted
Adjust audio position level (see page 14).
Sounds are intermittently distorted or
the noise is heard by the outside noise or the noise may be heard by the outside
This is not a malfunction. But if this
continues, turn on the receiver again.
such as a lightning discharge.
noise such as a lightning discharge but the
sound will be restored automatically.
No picture is displayed on the monitor. Connections are incorrect.
Input mode is incorrect.
Check the video connections (see pages 7
to 10) after unplugging the power code.
Check the component video input mode
(see page 25).
Remote control does not operate as
you intend.
The remote control is not ready for your
intended operation.
Set the mode selector correctly, then press
the corresponding source selecting button
or SOUND before operation
Remote control does not work.
There is an obstruction hiding the remote
sensor on the receiver.
Remove the obstruction.
Batteries are weak.
Replace batteries.
The mode selector is set to the incorrect
position.
Set the mode selector to the proper
position.
Buttons cannot be used.
TV Direct is activated.
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM Incoming signal is too weak.
reception.
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact
your dealer.
The station is too far away.
Select another station.
The wrong antenna is being used.
Check with your dealer to be sure you have
the correct antenna.
Antennas are not connected properly.
Check the connections.
Occasional cracking noise during FM
reception.
Ignition noise from automobiles.
Move the antenna farther from automobile
traffic.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Specifications
Composite video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:
Y (luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
C (chrominance, burst):
Component: DVR/DVD, VCR:
Y (luminance):
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
PB, PR:
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Video Output Level/Impedance:
Designs and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Composite video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
Y (luminance):
C (chrominance, burst):
Component: MONITOR OUT:
Y (luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Amplifier
Output Power
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
At stereo operation:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Negative
Front channels:
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10%
total harmonic distortion.
PB, PR:
Synchronization:
At surround operation:
Front channels:
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
FM tuner (IHF)
Tuning Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
Monaural:
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
Center channel:
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 Ω at
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Monaural:
Surround channels: 100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
16.0 dBf (1.7 µV/75 Ω)
37.5 dBf (20.5 µV/75 Ω)
Stereo:
Stereo Separation at OUT(REC): 35 dB at 1 kHz
Surround back channel:
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 Ω at
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
AM tuner
Tuning Range:
* Measured on AC 110 V, 127 V, 220 V, and 240 V.
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
Audio
General
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Power Requirements:
AC 110 V/127 V/220 V/230 V – 240 V
adjustable with the voltage selector,
50 Hz/60 Hz
,
DVR/DVD (DVD MULTI), VCR, DBS, TV:
330 mV/47 kΩ
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)*:
Power Consumption:
120 W (at operation)
Coaxial: DIGITAL IN 1(DVR/DVD):
5 W (in standby mode)
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Optical: DIGITAL IN 2(DBS), 3(VCR):
–21 dBm to –15 dBm
Dimensions (W x H x D): 435 mm x 70 mm x 317.2 mm
Mass: 6.3 kg
(660 nm 30 nm)
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS (with
sampling frequency—32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).
Audio Output Level:
DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
330 mV
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/DIN): 80 dB/62 dB
Frequency Response (8 Ω):
Bass Boost:
20 Hz to 20 kHz ( 1 dB)
+4 dB 1 dB at 100 Hz
Equalization (at DSP operation):
Center frequency:
Control range:
63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz
8 dB
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT
VOLTAGE
ANTENNA
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
SELECTOR
110V
Y
PB
PR
220V
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
PCM/
STREAM
BACK
VCR
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
FM 75
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
AM EXT
DIGITAL IN
DVD MULTI IN
COAXIAL
AUDIO
230 -
240V
L
127V
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
R
AV
VCR
DVR/DVD
IN
SUB-
VCR
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
COMPU
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
DVR
OUT
(REC)
IN
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
WOOFER
OUT (REC)
(PLAY)
(PLAY)
OUT
LINK-III
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
220V
230 -
240V
127V
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your
mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the
position of the voltage selector switch provided on
the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset
the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
EN
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0505RYMMDWJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
RX-F31S
INSTRUCTIONS
LVT1306-012A
[A]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions, and Others
Caution––
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely.
The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not
STANDBY/ON button!
disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper
or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be
considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of
these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.
Locate the apparatus as follows:
Front:
Sides:
Back:
No obstructions open spacing.
No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back.
No obstructions, place on the level surface.
Bottom:
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.
Spacing 15 cm or more
RX-F31S
Front
Wall or
obstructions
Stand height 15 cm or more
Floor
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Parts identification ................................................ 2
Getting started ...................................................... 4
Before Installation .................................................................. 4
Checking the supplied accessories ....................................... 4
Putting batteries in the remote control ................................... 4
Setting the voltage selector ................................................... 4
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 5
Connecting the speakers ....................................................... 6
Connecting video components .............................................. 7
Connecting the power cord .................................................. 11
Basic operations ................................................. 12
1 Turn on the power ............................................................. 12
2 Select the source to play .................................................. 12
3 Adjust the volume ............................................................. 13
Selecting the digital decode mode....................................... 13
Adjusting the subwoofer audio position ............................... 14
Activating TV Direct ............................................................. 14
Turning off the sounds temporarily ...................................... 15
Changing the display brightness.......................................... 15
Turning off the power with the Sleep Timer ......................... 15
Basic settings...................................................... 16
Setting the speaker information automatically
—Smart Surround Setup ............................................... 16
Basic setting items ............................................................... 18
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 18
Menu operation buttons................................................... 18
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 19
Menu operating procedure................................................... 20
Setting the items .................................................................. 21
Setting the speakers ....................................................... 21
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting—EX/ES/PLIIx ........... 22
Selecting the main or sub channel—DUAL MONO ......... 23
Setting bass sound.......................................................... 23
Using the Midnight mode—MIDNIGHT MODE ............... 24
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminals
—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3 ................................................... 24
Selecting the component video input mode
—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT ............... 25
Superimposing the menus—SUPERIMPOSE ................ 25
Converting S-video signals into composite video signals
—DOWN MIX............................................................ 25
Converting composite video signals into S-video signals
—Y/C SEPARATE ..................................................... 25
Sound adjustments ............................................. 26
Basic adjustment items........................................................ 26
Operation through on-screen display menus ....................... 26
Menu operation buttons................................................... 26
Setup menu configuration ............................................... 27
Menu operating procedure................................................... 28
Adjusting the items .............................................................. 29
Adjusting speaker output level ........................................ 29
Adjusting the equalization patterns
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz ........ 30
Adjusting the bass sounds .............................................. 30
Adjusting the sound parameters for the
Surround/DSP modes ............................................... 31
Tuner operations ................................................. 32
Tuning in to stations manually.............................................. 32
Using preset tuning .............................................................. 32
Selecting the FM reception mode ........................................ 33
Creating realistic sound fields........................... 34
Reproducing theater ambience ........................................... 34
Introducing the Surround modes ......................................... 34
Introducing the DSP modes................................................. 37
Using the Surround/DSP modes ......................................... 38
Activating the Surround/DSP modes ................................... 39
AV COMPU LINK remote control system .......... 40
Operating other JVC products ........................... 42
Operating other manufacturers’ products ........ 44
Troubleshooting .................................................. 47
Specifications...................................................... 48
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote control
See pages in parentheses for details.
Parts identification
1
2
TV DIRECT button (14)
Source selecting buttons (12, 14, 32, 33)
DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, DVD MULTI, FM/AM
Operating buttons for tuner (32, 33)
3
4
( TUNING, FM MODE, TUNING 9, MEMORY
On-screen display operation buttons (18, 26)
Cursor buttons (3, 2, 5, ∞),
SET
5
6
7
8
9
SMART SURROUND SETUP button (16)
EX/ES button (22)
SOUND button (13, 14, 22, 24, 30, 31)
SURROUND button (39)
Adjusting buttons for speaker and subwoofer output levels (29)
FRONT L +/–, FRONT R +/–, CENTER +/–, SUBWFR +/–,
SURR L +/–, SURR R +/–, S.BACK +/–
AUDIO button (12, 14)
MUTING button (15)
VOLUME +/– button (13)
Mode selector (12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 26, 29 – 32, 39)
DVR, DVD, AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS
MENU button (18, 26)
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
-
REMOTE CONTROL RM SRXF31U
1
2
p
q
w
e
p
r
t
• Numeric buttons (33)
q
w
• Adjusting buttons (13, 14, 24, 30, 31)
DECODE, EQ FREQ, BASS BOOST, C.TONE,
EQ LEVEL 9, MIDNIGHT, EFFECT, EQ LEVEL (,
A.POSITION
e
y
u
i
o
DIMMER button (15)
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (12)
TEST TONE button (17, 29)
3
SLEEP button (15)
r
SET
The buttons which are not indicated here can be used for
operating other JVC products or other manufacturers’ products.
For details, see pages 42 to 46.
4
5
• When operating this receiver, set the mode selector (e)
to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
• When operating a JVC DVD recorder, set the mode
selector (e) to “DVR.”
t
• When operating a JVC DVD player, set the mode selector
(e) to “DVD.”
6
y
u
7
8
9
i
o
To open the cover of the
remote control, push here
then slide downward.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See pages in parentheses for details.
Front panel
1
2
3
4
SOURCE
SELECTOR
MASTER
VOLUME
RX-F31
HOME CINEMA CONTROL CENTER
/
MULTI JOG
DVR MULTI
DVR
/
DVD
VCR
DBS
TV
FM / AM
SET / TUNER PRESET
STANDBY
PHONES
/
ON
TV DIRECT
SETTING
ADJUST
SURROUND
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
1
2
STANDBY/ON button and standby lamp (12, 14, 32)
Source lamps
7
SETTING button (18, 32)
ADJUST button (26, 32)
SURROUND button (39)
Remote sensor (4)
Display window (see below)
• SET button (17, 18, 26)
8
9
p
q
w
DVD MULTI, DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS, TV, FM/AM
• SOURCE SELECTOR (12, 14, 33)
• MULTI JOG (18, 26, 33, 39)
MASTER VOLUME control (13)
PHONES jack (13)
3
4
5
6
• TUNER PRESET button (33)
TV DIRECT button (14)
Display window
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
9
0
-
8
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
PL
x
LPCM
L
C
R
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
$
~
! @ #
%
^
=
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
EQ indicator (30)
C.TONE indicator (31)
VIRTUAL SB indicator (38)
and indicator (35)
AUDIO P. (position) indicator (14)
Neo:6 indicator (36)
BASS indicator (30)
Tuner operation indicators (32)
TUNED, ST (stereo)
-
=
ATT (attenuator) indicator (30)
Digital signal format indicators (13, 34 – 36)
LPCM (Linear PCM), DOLBY D (Dolby Digital), DTS, 96/24
Signal and speaker indicators (15)
DSP indicator (36, 37)
AUTO SR (surround) indicator (39)
3D indicator (36, 37)
~
!
@
#
$
%
Main display
Frequency unit indicators
MHz (for FM station), kHz (for AM station)
HP (headphones) indicator (13, 36, 37)
9
0
AUTO MUTING indicator (33)
SLEEP indicator (15)
^
Rear panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
ANTENNA
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
Y
PB
PR
110V
220V
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
PCM/
STREAM
BACK
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
FM 75
VCR
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
VIDEO
DIGITAL IN
DVD MULTI IN
AM EXT
COAXIAL
IN
AUDIO
230 -
240V
L
127V
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
R
AV
VCR
DVR/DVD
IN
SUB-
VCR
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
COMPU
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
DVR
OUT
IN
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
WOOFER
OUT (REC)
(PLAY)
(REC)
(PLAY)
OUT
LINK-III
7
8
9
p q
w
1
2
3
Power cord (11)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (4)
DVD MULTI IN jacks (8)
SUBWOOFER, CENTER, SURR-R, SURR-L
ANTENNA terminals (5)
DIGITAL IN terminals (11)
• Coaxial: 1(DVR/DVD)
• Optical: 2(DBS), 3(VCR)
DIGITAL OUT terminal (11)
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR) jacks (7 – 10)
VCR IN, DVR/DVD IN, MONITOR OUT
8
VIDEO terminals (7 – 10)
VIDEO (composite video) jacks, S-VIDEO terminals
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT
AUDIO jacks (7 – 10)
• Input: DVR/DVD IN (PLAY), VCR IN (PLAY), DBS IN, TV IN
• Output: DVR OUT (REC), VCR OUT (REC), MONITOR OUT
SUBWOOFER OUT jack (6)
AV COMPU LINK-III terminals (40)
SPEAKERS terminals (6)
FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND, SURROUND BACK
4
5
9
p
q
w
6
7
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Putting batteries in the remote control
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.
Getting started
1
2
3
1 Press and slide the battery cover on the back
Before Installation
of the remote control.
2 Insert batteries.
General precautions
• Be sure your hands are dry.
• Turn the power off to all components.
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going
to connect.
Make sure to match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
3 Replace the cover.
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases,
replace the batteries. Use two R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell
batteries.
Locations
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from
moisture and dust.
• Supplied butteries are for initial setup. Replace for continued
use.
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C
and 35˚C.
CAUTION:
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.
• Leave sufficient distance between the receiver and the TV.
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage.
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.
Handling the receiver
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or
cabinet.
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When
unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage
the cord.
• When you are away on travel or otherwise for an extended
period or time, remove the plug from the wall outlet. A small
amount of power is always consumed while the power cord is
connected to the wall outlet.
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on the front panel.
Remote sensor
The receiver has a built-in cooling fan which operates
while the receiver is turned on. Be sure to leave enough
ventilation to obtain sufficient cooling effect.
CAUTION:
To operate the receiver, set
the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all
connections are completed.
Checking the supplied accessories
Check to be sure you have all of the following supplied
accessories. If anything is missing, contact your dealer
immediately.
Setting the voltage selector
Before connections, always do the following first if necessary.
Select the correct voltage in VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear
of the receiver by using a screw driver.
• Remote control (× 1)
• Batteries (× 2)
• AM loop antenna (× 1)
• FM antenna (× 1)
• Check to be sure if the voltage mark is set to the voltage for
your area where this unit plugs in.
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
• Digital coaxial cable (× 1)
110V
220V
230 -
240V
127V
Voltage mark
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Snap the tabs on the loop
into the slots of the base to
assemble the AM loop
antenna.
If FM reception is poor, connect an
outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).
AM LOOP
ANTENNA
FM 75
If AM reception is poor, connect
AM EXT
COAXIAL
an outdoor single vinyl-covered
wire (not supplied).
FM antenna (supplied)
220V
110V
127V
ANTENNA
230 -
240V
NOTES
AM antenna connection
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl,
remove the vinyl while twisting it as shown on the
right.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch
any other terminals, connecting cords and power
cord. This could cause poor reception.
Connect the AM loop antenna supplied to the AM LOOP
terminals.
Connect the white cord to the AM EXT terminal, and connect the
black cord to the H terminal.
Turn the loop until you have the best reception.
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered
wire (not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. Keep the AM loop
antenna connected.
FM antenna connection
Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM 75 Ω COAXIAL
terminal as a temporary measure.
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.
• If the reception is poor, connect an outdoor FM antenna (not
supplied). Before attaching a 75 Ω coaxial cable with a
connector (IEC or DIN 45325) , disconnect the supplied FM
antenna.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the speakers
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
Speaker Layout Diagram
C
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
SW
RS
L
R
Center speaker (C)
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
LS
SB
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
BACK
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
SPEAKERS
Powered
subwoofer
(SW)
AV
COMPU
LINK-III
SUB-
WOOFER
OUT
Right front speaker
(R)
Left front speaker
(L)
Surround back
speaker (SB)
Right surround
speaker (RS)
Left surround
speaker (LS)
Connecting the speakers
Connecting the powered subwoofer
By connecting a subwoofer, you can enhance the bass or
reproduce the original LFE signals recorded in digital software.
Turn off all components before making connections.
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the
SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cord
with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
2
3
1
1
2
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your subwoofer.
After connecting all the speakers and/or a subwoofer, set the
speaker setting information properly to obtain the best possible
surround effect. For details, see pages 16, 17, and 21 to 23.
1 Twist and remove the insulation at the end of each
NOTE
speaker cord.
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.
2 Press and hold the clamp of the speaker terminal
(1), then insert the speaker cord (2).
• For each speaker, connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the
rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the
speakers.
3 Release the finger from the clamp.
CAUTIONS:
• Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the
speaker terminals (6 Ω – 16 Ω).
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker
terminal.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting video components
Do not connect the AC power plug to the wall outlet until all connections are completed.
This receiver is equipped with the following video terminals—
composite video, S-video, and component video terminals.
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or
component video (Y, PB, PR) jacks, connect them using an S-
video cable (not supplied) or component video cable (not
supplied). By using these terminals, you can get a better picture
quality in the order:
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their
manuals.
DO NOT use a TV through a VCR or a TV with a built-in
VCR; otherwise, the picture may be distorted.
Component > S-video > Composite
IMPORTANT:
CAUTION:
Component video signals are transmitted only through component
video output jacks. Therefore, if a recording video component and
a playing video component are connected to the receiver through
the video terminals of different type, you cannot record the picture.
In addition, if the TV and a playing video component are
connected to the receiver through the video terminals of different
type, you cannot view the playback picture on the TV.
On the other hand, S-video signals and composite video signals
can be converted into each other and transmitted through the
corresponding output jack. For details about the settings of the
conversion, see page 25.
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic
equalizer between the source components and this receiver, the
sound output through this receiver may be distorted.
If your video components have AV COMPU LINK terminal
See also page 40 for detailed information about the connection
and the AV COMPU LINK remote control system.
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its stereo output jacks (DVR/DVD):
Red
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
AUDIO
White
Red
DVR
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
OUT
(REC)
OUT (REC)
DVD recorder or
DVD player
Å
ı
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç Î
Composite video cable
(not supplied)
‰ Ï
Ì
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
VCR
IN
DVR/DVD
IN
S-VIDEO
VCR
OUT
(REC)
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
S-video cable (not supplied)
COMPONENT
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel output
NOTES
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right audio channel
input
Ç Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input
Î To composite video output
‰ To S-video output
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input
Ì To component video output
• When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the
component video input jacks, make the component video input
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see
page 25.
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for
a DVD recorder and DVD player is set to use the digital coaxial
terminal (DIGITAL IN 1 (DVR/DVD)). For details of digital
connection, see page 11.
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player with its analog discrete output jacks (DVD MULTI IN):
This connection is the best connection method for enjoying DVD Audio sounds. When a DVD Audio disc is played back, the original high-
quality sounds can be reproduced only using this connection.
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
Monaural audio cable
(not supplied)
Red
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
Red
AUDIO
White
White
Stereo audio cable
(not supplied)
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
DVR
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
OUT
(REC)
Red
OUT (REC)
DVD MULTI IN
Å ı Ç Î ‰
220V
110V
230 -
240V
127V
Ï
DVD recorder or
DVD player
Ì Ó È Ô
Y
PB
PR
VIDEO
Composite video
VCR
IN
cable (not supplied)
DVR/DVD
IN
S-VIDEO
VCR
OUT
(REC)
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
COMPONENT
S-video cable (not supplied)
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right front channel audio output
NOTE
ı Only for DVD recorder: To left/right front channel
audio input
Ç To left/right surround channel audio output
Î To center channel audio output
‰ To subwoofer output
When connecting a DVD recorder or DVD player to the
component video input jacks, make the component video input
setting (DVD VIDEO INPUT) correctly. If you do not, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly. For details, see
page 25.
Ï Only for DVD recorder: To composite video input
Ì To composite video output
Ó To S-video output
È Only for DVD recorder: To S-video input
Ô To component video output
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
About “DVD MULTI”
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source (see page 12), you can enjoy analog discrete output sound (5.1-channel reproduction)
from the connected component.
• You may need to select analog discrete output mode on the component.
NOTES
• When using the headphones, you can listen to the front channel sounds (left and right) only. 3D HEADPHONE mode (see pages 36
and 37) is not available.
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected source—
“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” and “DBS” (see page 14).
• Surround/DSP modes (see pages 34 to 39) are not available for “DVD MULTI.”
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a VCR
Turn off all components before making connections.
Red
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
White
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)
White
Red
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
VCR
DBS
IN
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
Å
ı
VCR
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
‰ Ï Ì
Y
PB
PR
Î
Composite video
VCR
IN
cable (not supplied)
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VCR
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
DBS
IN
COMPONENT
S-video cable (not supplied)
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel output
NOTES
ı To left/right audio channel input
Ç To composite video input
Î To composite video output
‰ To S-video output
• When connecting a VCR to the component video input jacks,
make the component video input setting (VCR VIDEO INPUT)
correctly. If you do not, you cannot view the playback picture on
the TV or the AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot
operate properly. For details, see page 25.
Ï To S-video input
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for
a video component other than DVD recorder and DVD player is
set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 3 (VCR)). For
details of digital connection, see page 11.
Ì To component video output
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
7 Connecting a DBS tuner
White
Stereo audio cable (not supplied)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
TV
IN
Red
Å
DBS tuner
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
ı
Composite video cable (not supplied)
S-video cable (not supplied)
VCR
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
Å To left/right audio channel output
ı To composite video output
Ç To S-video output
NOTE
You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. When shipped from the factory, the audio input mode for a
TV is set to use the digital optical terminal (DIGITAL IN 2 (DBS)).
For details of digital connection, see page 11.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Connecting a TV
Connect the TV to the appropriate MONITOR OUT jacks to view the playback picture from any other connected video components.
Turn off all components before making connections.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals.
Red
White
L
Stereo audio cable
White
Red
(not supplied)
Å ı
R
SUB-
WOOFER
OUT
TV
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Ç
Î ‰
Y
PB
PR
VCR
Composite video cable
(not supplied)
IN
DVR/DVD
IN
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
S-video cable (not supplied)
COMPONENT
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cable (not supplied)
Å To left/right audio channel input
NOTES
ı To left/right audio channel output
Ç To composite video input
Î To S-video input
‰ To component video input
• Connect Y, PB, and PR correctly.
• You can enjoy digital sound if using a digital coaxial or optical
cable. For details of digital connection, see page 11.
• When connecting a TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR
OUT jacks, the on-screen display does not appear on the TV
screen (see page 25).
IMPORTANT:
Audio signals come out through the MONITOR OUT (L/R) jacks
ONLY when TV Direct is in use (see page 14).
Connect these jacks to the audio input jacks corresponding to the
video connection; otherwise, no sound comes out of the TV
speaker when TV Direct is in use.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Digital output terminal
You can connect any digital components which have an optical
digital input terminal.
Digital connection
This receiver is equipped with three DIGITAL IN terminals—one
digital coaxial terminal and two digital optical terminals—and one
DIGITAL OUT terminal.
To reproduce the digital sound, use the digital connection in
addition to the analog connection methods described on pages 7
to 10.
220V
110V
127V
230 -
240V
Digital coaxial cable (supplied: 1 cable)
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
DIGITAL OUT
PCM/
STREAM
Turn off all components before making connections.
Connecting digital recording equipment to the
DIGITAL OUT terminal enables you to perform
digital-to-digital recording.
• When you connect other components, refer also to their
manuals.
7 Digital input terminals
220V
110V
127V
NOTE
230 -
240V
The digital signal format transmitted through the DIGITAL OUT
terminal is the same as that of the input signal. For example,
when the DTS signals are input, the DTS signals are transmitted.
When the component has a digital coaxial output
terminal, connect it to the 1(DVR/DVD) terminal,
using a digital coaxial cable (supplied).
Connecting the power cord
When all the audio/video connections have been made, connect
the AC power plug to the wall outlet. Make sure that the plugs are
inserted firmly. The standby lamp lights in red.
CAUTIONS:
1(DVR/DVD)
DIGITAL IN
2(DBS)
3(VCR)
• Do not plug in before setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch
on the rear of the receiver and all connection procedures are
complete.
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not alter, twist or pull the power cord, or put anything heavy
on it, which may cause fire, electric shock, or other accidents.
• If the cord is damaged, consult a dealer and have the power
cord replaced with a new one.
When the component has a digital optical output
terminal, connect it to the 2(DBS) or 3(VCR)
terminal, using a digital optical cable (not supplied).
NOTES
• Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen
interference.
Before connecting a digital
optical cable, unplug the
protective plug.
• The preset settings such as preset channels and sound
adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases:
– When you unplug the power cord.
– When a power failure occurs.
NOTES
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have
been set for use with the following components:
– 1(DVR/DVD): For DVD recorder or DVD player
– 2(DBS):
– 3(VCR):
For DBS tuner
For VCR
If you connect other components, change the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. See “Setting the digital
input (DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.
• Select the digital input mode. See “Selecting the analog or
digital input mode” on page 12.
• When you want to operate the connected component (except
DBS tuner) using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system
(see pages 40 and 41), connect them also as described on
pages 7 to 10.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the source to play
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until the source name
you want appears on the display.
Basic operations
On the front panel:
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights in
red.
• As you turn SOURCE SELECTOR, the source changes as
follows:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
The on-screen display appears on the TV screen for 5 seconds
(except “turning off the sounds temporarily”) to show the
indication in the following cases:
– When you select the source (see right column).
– When you adjust the volume (see page 13).
– When you turn off the sounds temporarily (see page 15).
– When you select the Surround/DSP modes (see page 39).
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to “SUPERIMPOSE:
OFF” (see page 25).
DVD MULTI
DVR/DVD (DGT)
DBS (DIGITAL)
VCR (DIGITAL)
TV (DIGITAL)
(Back to the beginning)
FM
AM
DVD MULTI:
Select for the DVD player using the analog
discrete output mode (5.1-channel
reproduction).
1
2
3
DVR/DVD (DGT) : Select for the DVD recorder or DVD player.
*
VCR (DIGITAL) : Select for the VCR.
*
DBS (DIGITAL) : Select for the DBS tuner.
*
Source lamps
TV (DIGITAL) :
Select for the TV.
*
FM:
AM:
Select for an FM broadcast.
Select for an AM broadcast.
1
2
From the remote control:
Press one of the source selecting buttons.
• For the tuner, press FM/AM. Each time you press FM/AM, the
band alternates between “FM” and “AM.”
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set
the mode selector to
3
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
* Selecting the analog or digital input mode
For a component you have connected using both the analog
connection and the digital connection methods (see pages 7 to 11),
you need to select the correct input mode.
• You can select the digital input only for sources which you have
selected digital input terminals for. (See “Setting the digital input
(DIGITAL IN) terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3” on page 24.)
From the remote control ONLY:
Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to select the
analog or digital input mode.
1 Turn on the power
AUDIO on the
• Each time you press the button, the input mode alternates
between the analog input (“ANALOG”) and the digital input
(“DGTL AUTO”).
Press
STANDBY/ON (or
This setting is memorized for each source.
remote control).
The standby lamp goes off and the source lamp of the current
source lights in red.
DGTL AUTO:
Select for the digital input mode. The receiver
automatically detects the incoming signal
format, then the digital signal format indicator
(LPCM, DOLBY D, DTS, or DTS 96/24) for
the detected signal lights up.
Current source name appears.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
ANALOG:
Select for the analog input mode.
Initial setting: DGTL AUTO
To turn off the power (into standby)
NOTE
Press
again.
STANDBY/ON (or
AUDIO on the remote control)
When you select “DVD MULTI,” “FM,” or “AM” as the source, the
analog and digital input mode is not available.
The standby lamp lights in red.
NOTE
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn
the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust the volume
Selecting the digital decode mode
If the following symptoms occur while playing Dolby Digital or DTS
software with “DGTL AUTO” selected (see page 12), follow the
procedure below:
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.
• Noise comes out while searching for or skipping chapters or
tracks.
To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME
control clockwise (or press VOLUME + on the
remote control).
To decrease the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME
control counterclockwise (or press VOLUME – on
the remote control).
• When you adjust the volume, the volume level indication
appears on the display for a while.
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SOUND, then press DECODE to select
“DOLBY D” or “DTS.”
• Each time you press DECODE, the digital decode mode
changes as follows:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
CAUTION:
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any
sources. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of
sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin
your speakers.
DGTL AUTO
DOLBY D
(Back to the beginning)
DTS
• To play back software encoded with Dolby Digital, select
“DOLBY D.”
• To play back software encoded with DTS, select “DTS.”
NOTE
The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0”
(minimum) to “50” (maximum).
NOTES
• When you turn off the power or select another source,
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” is canceled and the digital decode mode is
automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you
intend.
Listening with headphones
You can enjoy not only stereo software but also multi-channel
software through the headphones. (Sounds are down-mixed to the
front channels while playing multi-channel software.)
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
front panel to activate the HEADPHONE mode.
The HP (headphone) indicator lights up on the display.
• You can also enjoy the Surround/DSP mode through the
headphones—3D HEADPHONE mode. For details, see pages
36 and 37.
• Disconnecting a pair of headphones from the PHONES jack
cancels the HEADPHONE (or 3D HEADPHONE) mode and
activates the speakers.
The following digital signal format indicators on the display
indicate what type of signal comes into the receiver.
LPCM:
Lights up when Linear PCM signal comes in.
DOLBY D: • Lights up when Dolby Digital signal comes in.
• Flashes when “DOLBY D” is selected for any
software other than Dolby Digital.
CAUTION:
DTS:
• Lights up when conventional DTS signal comes
in.
• Flashes when “DTS” is selected for any
software other than DTS.
Be sure to turn down the volume:
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume
can damage both the headphones and your hearing.
• Before removing headphones, as high volume may output from
the speakers.
DTS 96/24: Lights up when DTS 96/24 signal comes in.
NOTE
When “DGTL AUTO” cannot recognize the incoming signal, no
digital signal format indicator lights up on the display.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Activating TV Direct
TV Direct enables you to use this receiver as an AV selector
while the receiver is turned off.
When TV Direct is activated, the pictures and sounds go from the
video components such as DVD player to the TV through this
receiver. Thus, you can use the video components and the TV as
if they were connected directly.
• This function takes effect for the following sources—DVR/DVD,
VCR, and DBS.
To activate (or deactivate) TV Direct, follow the procedure below:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set
the mode selector to
1 Press TV DIRECT.
All the indications disappear, then the source lamp of the
current source lights in green.
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
2 Turn on the video component and TV.
3 Select the target video component.
On the front panel:
Turn SOURCE SELECTOR until one of the
source lamps—DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS—lights
in green.
From the remote control:
Press one of the source selecting buttons—
DVR/DVD, VCR, or DBS.
The source lamp corresponding to the selected source lights
in green.
Adjusting the subwoofer audio
position
If the subwoofer sound is much reinforced for stereo sound
compared to the sound reproduced with multi-channel, set the
subwoofer audio position. The subwoofer output level is
automatically decreased by the selected value when you are
listening in stereo.
To cancel TV Direct and turn off the receiver, press
STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or
control).
AUDIO on the remote
The receiver is turned off and the standby lamp lights up.
The AUDIO P. indicator lights up when this function is activated.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
To cancel TV Direct and turn on the receiver, press TV DIRECT
again.
The receiver is turned on and the source lamp currently selected
lights in red.
From the remote control ONLY:
NOTES
Press SOUND, then press A.POSITION repeatedly.
• When TV Direct is activated, you cannot enjoy any of the sound
effects the receiver produces, and cannot use the speakers
connected to the receiver.
• When TV Direct is activated while “DVD MULTI,” “FM,” or “AM” is
selected as the source, the source changes to the last selected
source—“DVR/DVD,” “VCR,” or “DBS.”
• Each time you press A.POSITION, the subwoofer audio position
level changes as follows:
AUDIO P. indicator
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
–2
–4
–6
OFF (canceled)
The smaller the number becomes, the more the level decreases
automatically when listening in stereo.
• If no adjustment is required, select “OFF” (initial setting).
NOTES
• The minimum subwoofer output level is –10 dB.
Ex.: When setting the subwoofer output level to “–8 (dB)” and
the subwoofer audio position to “–4 (dB),” the subwoofer
output level when listening in stereo will be –10 dB.
To adjust the subwoofer output level, see page 29.
• This function is not available when the Surround/DSP mode is
activated or “DVD MULTI” is selected.
• After pressing SOUND, the numeric buttons work for sound
adjustments. To use the numeric buttons to operate your target
source, press the corresponding source selecting button before
operation; otherwise, the remote control may not work as you
intend.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel the Sleep Timer:
Press SLEEP repeatedly so that “SLEEP OFF” appears on the
display. (The SLEEP indicator goes off.)
• The Sleep Timer is also canceled when:
– You turn off the receiver, or
Turning off the sounds temporarily
From the remote control ONLY:
– TV Direct is activated.
Press MUTING to turn off the sound through all
connected speakers and headphones.
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off.
Basic adjustment of auto memory
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source:
• when you turn off the power, and
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
• when you change the source.
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the
newly selected source are automatically recalled.
The following can be stored for each source:
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 12)
• Subwoofer audio position (see page 14)
• Midnight mode (see page 24)
• Speaker output level (see page 29)
• Digital equalization pattern (see page 30)
• Bass boost (see page 30)
• Pressing VOLUME +/– (or turning MASTER VOLUME control
on the front panel) also restores the sound.
Changing the display brightness
You can dim the display—Dimmer.
• Subwoofer phase (see page 30)
• Input attenuator mode (see page 30)
• Surround/DSP mode selection (see page 39)
From the remote control ONLY:
Press DIMMER repeatedly.
• Each time you press the button, the display brightness changes
as follows:
NOTE
If the source is “FM” or “AM,” you can assign a different setting
for each band.
DIMMER 1:
Dims the display slightly.
Dims the blue illumination slightly.
Dims the display more than DIMMER 1.
Dims the blue illumination slightly (more than
DIMMER 1).
DIMMER 2:
Signal and speaker indicators on the display
Signal indicators
Speaker indicators
DIMMER 3:
Turns off the display and blue illumination.
(Temporarily canceled when you operate the
receiver.*)
L
C
R
L
C
R
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P.
DIMMER OFF: Cancels the Dimmer (normal display).
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO :
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
x
S.WFRLFE
OLBY D
DTS
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
* Except when activating or deactivating TV Direct.
LS SB RS
The signal indicators light up as follows:
Turning off the power with the Sleep
Timer
L:
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the
left channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the
right channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.
You can fall asleep while listening to music—Sleep Timer.
R:
C:
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SLEEP repeatedly.
• Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes in 10
minute intervals. The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display.
LS*: Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes
in.
RS*: Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes
SLEEP indicator
in.
SB: Lights up when the surround back channel signal
comes in.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
LFE: Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
* When monaural surround signal comes in, only “S” lights up.
10
20
30
40
90
50
80
60
NOTE
When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, all the signal
indicators except “SB” light up.
OFF (canceled)
70
When the shut-off time comes:
The receiver turns off automatically.
The speaker indicators light up as follows:
S . WFR
• The subwoofer indicator (
) lights up when
“SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER:YES.” For details,
see page 21.
• The other speaker indicators light up only when the
corresponding speaker is set to “SMALL” or “LARGE,” and
also when required for the current playback.
To check or change the remaining time until the shut-off
time:
Press SLEEP once.
The remaining time (in minutes) until the shut-off time appears.
• To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the remote control ONLY:
Basic settings
When operating the receiver using the remote control,
set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
To obtain the best possible sound effect from Surround/DSP
modes (see pages 34 to 39), you need to set up the speaker and
subwoofer information after all the connections are completed.
From pages 16 to 25, how to set speakers and other basic items
of the receiver are explained.
1
Take your position where you listen to the
sound.
• Make sure speaker cables are connected firmly.
Setting the speaker information
automatically—Smart Surround Setup
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect
from the Surround/DSP modes.
By using Smart Surround Setup, the following are automatically
calculated by one simple action—clapping hands.
• Speaker distance (compared to that of the closest speaker)
• Speaker output level (except the subwoofer)
NOTES
2 Press and hold SMART SURROUND SETUP
• Before starting Smart Surround Setup, set the speaker
information correctly (SMALL, LARGE, or NO) according to your
speakers except the subwoofer (see page 21).
• The speakers which are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see
page 21) are not indicated clearly on the TV screen.
• When the setting is made by Smart Surround Setup, the
speaker distance and output level you have set before will be
inactive.
until “SETTING UP” flashes.
*1
*2
*3
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L
C
R
• You can see the setting process on the TV screen and the
display during Smart Surround Setup. If you have turned off the
display, cancel the Dimmer (see page 15); otherwise, you
cannot see the information on the display.
SETTING UP
SB
LS
RS
*6
*4
• Smart Surround Setup will not be done correctly if you or other
object blocks the sound.
• When you change your speakers, do the following procedure
again.
*5
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
L: Left front speaker
C: Center speaker
R: Right front speaker
RS: Right surround speaker
SB: Surround back speaker
LS: Left surround speaker
In this section, the on-screen display on the TV screen is used
for explaining.
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen
when connecting the TV through the COMPONENT
MONITOR OUT jacks (see page 10).
3 When “CLAPYOUR HANDS.” appears, clap
your hands over your head once while the
indications still remain.
• On the display, “SETTING UP” stops flashing.
The receiver starts detecting the level of the sound coming
through each speaker (except the subwoofer).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When your clapping sound is detected successfully
When your clapping sound is not detected correctly
• On the TV screen, “SUCCESSFUL,” “RESULT,” and the setting
“SETTING UP” appears again after one of the following
values appear. The setting values are shown for about 12
messages. In this case, repeat step 3.
seconds.
Ex.:
SILENT:
• The receiver detects sound from only the left
and right front speakers.
• The receiver detects no sound from the front
speakers and detects sound from at least one of
the other speakers.
*7
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L+2
C 0 R+2
STD+0.3m
SILENT-ALL: The receiver cannot detect any sound from any
+0.3m
speaker for about 10 seconds.
AGAIN:
• The receiver cannot detect sound from the left
or right front speaker.
• The receiver fails to calculate the speakers'
output level and difference of each speaker's
position in distance.
LS+6 SUCCESSFUL RS+6
+1.2m
RESULT
+1.2m
*8
*9
SB+4
+0.6m
In the following cases, set the speakers manually.
• On the display, “SUCCESSFUL” appears, then the setting
values are shown as follows for about 12 seconds:
Ex.:
• When “SILENT” appears twice in succession
The setting is partially made. (The distance of the speakers
from which sound has not been detected is set to “+9.0m
(+30ft).”)
*7
The receiver exits from Smart Surround Setup.
• When “MANUAL” appears
The receiver fails to detect the sound three times. The receiver
exits from Smart Surround Setup.
*8
*9
To cancel Smart Surround Setup, press SMART SURROUND
SETUP while “SETTING UP” flashes.
• No other operations can be accepted after “SETTING UP” stops
flashing. Complete the Smart Surround Setup.
R
LS
L
RS
C
SB
To check the current setting made by Smart Surround Setup,
press SMART SURROUND SETUP while the receiver is in
normal operation mode.
*7
Standard channel (the closest speaker).
This speaker position now works as the reference
position (“0m/ft”) and other speakers’ distance is
shown by the difference with this reference speaker
position.
The setting values appear. On the display, the setting values are
shown one after another.
• The current setting is not indicated but “MANUAL” appears if you
change the following settings after using Smart Surround Setup:
– If you change speaker distance manually.
*8
*9
Difference of each speaker position in distance (in
meters or feet).
Each speaker’s output level (–6 to +6).
– If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO.”
To check the current setting, see each setting item of the
speaker distance (see page 22) and the speaker output level
(see page 29).
When finishing displaying the setting values
• If you have not used Smart Surround Setup, “NO S.S.S.”
appears.
On the TV screen, “COMPLETED” appears, then “TEST TONE”
and “END” appear. On the display, “TEST? END?” appears.
• To adjust the speakers’ output levels manually, press TEST
TONE (see page 29).
• To erase the on-screen display, press SET or any button except
TEST TONE.
• The receiver returns to normal operation mode automatically if
no operations are done for about 10 seconds.
Ex.:
NOTES
• The speaker distance and output level manually set will be
applied instead of those set by using Smart Surround Setup in
the following cases:
– When you change one of the speaker distance (see page 22).
– When you change one of the speaker size either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO”
(see page 21).
• When you want to adjust the speaker distance and output level
manually, see pages 22 and 29.
• When the headphone is in use or “DVD MULTI” is selected as
the source, the receiver returns to normal operation mode
without showing “TEST TONE.”
SMART SURROUND SETUP
L+2
+0.3m
C 0 R+2
STD+0.3m
LS+6
+1.2m
TEST TONE RS+6
END
+1.2m
SB+4
+0.9m
• Do not clap your hands so hard that it may hurt your hands.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic setting items
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.
• You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.
Items and to do
SUBWOOFER (SUBWOOFER)
DUAL MONO (DUAL MONO)
Register your subwoofer. (21)
Select the Dual Mono sound channel. (23)
FRONT SPK (FRONT SPK)
SUBWFR OUT (SUBWFR OUT)
Register your front speaker size. (21)
Select sounds emitted from the subwoofer. (23)
CENTER SPK (CENTER SPK)
CROSSOVER (CROSSOVER)
Register your center speaker size. (21)
Select the cutoff frequency to the subwoofer. (23)
SURR. SPK (SURRND SPK)
LFE ATT (LFE ATT)
Register your surround speaker size. (21)
Attenuate the bass (LFE) sounds. (23)
SURR. BACK SPK (S BACK SPK)
MIDNIGHT (MIDNIGHT)
Register your surround back speaker size. (21)
Reproduce a powerful sound at night. (24)
DISTANCE UNIT (DIST UNIT)
DIGITAL IN 1 (DIGITAL IN1)
Select the measuring unit for the speaker distance. (22)
Select the component connected to the digital coaxial
terminal—1(DVR/DVD). (24)
FL SPK DISTANCE (FRNT L DIST)*
Register the distance from the left front speaker to your
listening point. (22)
DIGITAL IN 2 (DIGITAL IN2)
Select the component connected to the digital optical
terminal—2(DBS). (24)
FR SPK DISTANCE (FRNT R DIST)*
Register the distance from the right front speaker to your
listening point. (22)
DIGITAL IN 3 (DIGITAL IN3)
Select the component connected to the digital optical
terminal—3(VCR). (24)
C SPK DISTANCE (CENTER DIST)*
Register the distance from the center speaker to your listening DVD VIDEO (DVD VIDEO)
point. (22)
Select the type of video terminal used for the DVD recorder or
DVD player. (25)
LS SPK DISTANCE (SURR L DIST)*
Register the distance from the left surround speaker to your
listening point. (22)
VCR VIDEO (VCR VIDEO)
Select the type of video terminal used for the VCR. (25)
RS SPK DISTANCE (SURR R DIST)*
Register the distance from the right surround speaker to your
listening point. (22)
SUPERIMPOSE (SUPERIMPOSE)
Select to superimpose the menus on the TV screen. (25)
DOWN MIX (DOWN MIX)
SB SPK DISTANCE (S BACK DIST)*
Register the distance from the surround back speaker to your
listening point. (22)
Select to convert S-video signals into composite video signals.
(25)
Y/C SEPARATE (Y/C SEP.)
EX/ES/PLIIx (EX/ES/PLIIx)
Select to convert composite video signals into S-video signals.
(25)
Select the EX/ES/PLIIx reproduction mode. (22)
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.
Operation through on-screen display menus
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.
Menu operation buttons
From the remote control:
On the front panel:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control,
set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Button / JOG
To do
SETTING button show setting item previously selected.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous SETTING MENU.
Button
To do
MULTI JOG
• select a menu or an item.
• change a setting.
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”
5 / ∞ buttons select a menu or an item.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous SETTING MENU.
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu configuration
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)
TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (5)
SETTING MENU (1)
TOP MENU
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
SETTING MENU (1)
SUBWOOFER
5
SUBWOOFER
FRONT SPK
CENTER SPK
SURR. SPK
:
NO
: LARGE
: SMALL
: SMALL
FRONT SPEAKER
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL
∞
CENTER SPEAKER
:ENTER
:EXIT
SURROUND SPEAKER
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (2)
SETTING MENU (2)
DISTANCE UNIT
5
DISTANCE UNIT
:meter
FL SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
FR SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
C SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
LS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
RS SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
SB SPK DISTANCE : 3.0m
∞
FL SPK DISTANCE
FR SPK DISTANCE
CENTER SPK DISTANCE
LS SPK DISTANCE
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
RS SPK DISTANCE
SB SPK DISTANCE
SETTING MENU (3)
SETTING MENU (3)
5
EX/ES/PL x
DUAL MONO
EX/ES/PL x :
DUAL MONO :
SUBWFR OUT :
CROSSOVER :
AUTO
MAIN
150Hz
0dB
LFE ATT
MIDNIGHT
∞
:
:
SUBWOOFER OUT
CROSSOVER
OFF
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
LFE ATT
MIDNIGHT MODE
SETTING MENU (4)
SETTING MENU (4)
DIGITAL IN 1
DIGITAL IN 2
DIGITAL IN 3
DVD VIDEO INPUT
VCR VIDEO INPUT
5
DIGITAL IN 1: DVR/DVD
DIGITAL IN 2:
DIGITAL IN 3:
DBS
VCR
S/C
S/C
DVD VIDEO
VCR VIDEO
∞
:
:
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (5)
SETTING MENU (5)
SUPERIMPOSE
DOWN MIX
5
SUPERIMPOSE :
ON
OFF
OFF
DOWN MIX
:
Y/C SEPARATE:
∞
Y/C SEPARATE
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SETTING MENU (1)
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu operating procedure
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.
Ex.:When setting DIGITAL IN 1 terminal.
Operations
On the TV screen
On the display
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
1 To show “TOP MENU,” press MENU.
x
ATT
TOP MENU
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
“SETTING” appears.
:ENTER
:EXIT
“TOP MENU” appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
2 To select “SETTING MENU,” press SET.
x
ATT
SETTING MENU (1)
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SUBWOOFER
FRONT SPK
CENTER SPK
SURR. SPK
:
NO
: LARGE
: SMALL
: SMALL
The submenu previously
selected appears.
SURR. BACK SPK : SMALL
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
The setting item previously selected
appears.
3 To select the desired submenu, press
5 or ∞ repeatedly.
There are five screens from “SETTING MENU (1)”
to “SETTING MENU (5).” To change the screen,
simply pressing 5 or ∞ repeatedly.You can go to
the next/previous screen.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
Button indications on the screen
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.
TOP MENU
DIGITAL IN 1
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
:ENTER
:EXIT
23:OPERATE
:BACK
Usable buttons and their functions
Usable buttons and their functions
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
x
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
4 Press SET.
DIGITAL IN 1
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
The current setting of the
selected item appears.
23:OPERATE
:BACK
The selected submenu appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
5 To select the appropriate setting, press
2 or 3 repeatedly, then press SET.
x
ATT
DIGITAL IN 1
HP
MHz
kHz
DIGITAL IN 1:2DVR/DVD3
The on-screen display returns to the previous
SETTING MENU. In this example, “SETTING MENU
(4)” appears on the TV screen and “DIGITAL IN1”
appears on the display.
DVR/DVD
TV
DBS
VCR
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press
SET.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items
if necessary.
NOTES
• To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.
• To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press SETTING
when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.
• The setting item previously selected can be shown on the TV screen by pressing SETTING on the front panel when the receiver is in
normal operation mode.
Setting the items
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications on the display, the indications are slightly different from what is shown
on the on-screen display.
This is because of the limited number of characters shown on the display.
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER:YES” is shown as “SUBWFR:YES” on the display.
• “MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF” is shown as “NIGHT: OFF” on the display.
7 Setting the speaker size—FRONT SPEAKER,
CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND SPEAKER,
SURROUND BACK SPEAKER
Setting the speakers
7 Setting subwoofer information—SUBWOOFER
Each time the receiver turns on, the receiver detects the
subwoofer connection and automatically changes the setting of
the subwoofer.
When you want to change the setting manually, select either one
below.
Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.
LARGE
SMALL
NO
Select when the cone speaker size is larger than
12 cm.
Select when the cone speaker size is smaller than
12 cm.
SUBWOOFER:YES
Select when you have connected a subwoofer.
Select when you have disconnected a speaker.
(Not selectable for the front speakers.)
S . WFR
The subwoofer indicator (
) lights up on the display.You
can adjust the subwoofer output level (see page 29).
SUBWOOFER: NO
Initial setting: SMALL for all speakers*
Select when you have disconnected a subwoofer. Selecting
this changes the front speaker size to “LARGE” (see right
column).
* When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO,” the front
speaker size is fixed to “LARGE” (and you cannot select
“SMALL”).
NOTES
NOTE
• If you have selected “SMALL” for the front speaker size, you
cannot select “LARGE” for other speakers.
You need to change the setting each time you turn on the receiver
if you want to change the subwoofer information set automatically.
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
SMALL,” you cannot select “LARGE” for the surround back
speaker.
• When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
NO,” the surround back speaker is fixed to “NO.”
• If you change one of the speaker sizes either from “NO” to
“SMALL” or “LARGE,” or from “SMALL” or “LARGE” to “NO,” the
distance manually set will be applied instead of those set by
using Smart Surround Setup.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Setting the speaker distance
Activating the EX/ES/PLIIx setting
—EX/ES/PLIIx
Depending on this setting, available Surround modes for digital
multi-channel software vary—EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel)
reproduction or 5.1-channel reproduction. Select an appropriate
setting for your enjoyment.
• For details about relation between EX/ES/PLIIx setting and
available Surround mode, see page 38.
• To activate the Surround mode, see page 39.
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is one of
the important elements to obtain the best possible sound effect
from the Surround/DSP modes.
By referring to the speaker distance, the receiver automatically
sets the delay time of the sound through each speaker so that
sounds through all the speakers can reach you at the same time.
• If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17,
this setting is not required.
7 Measuring unit—DISTANCE UNIT
Select which measuring unit you use.
EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO
According to the incoming signal, an appropriate Surround
mode is applied.
DISTANCE UNIT: meter Select to set the distance in meters.
DISTANCE UNIT: feet
Select to set the distance in feet.
• For Dolby Digital Surround EX and DTS-ES software, 6.1-
channel reproduction is applied*.
• For other multi-channel (more than 4 channel) encoded
software, 5.1-channel reproduction is applied.
Initial setting: DISTANCE UNIT: meter
7 Speaker distance—
EX/ES/PLIIx: ON
FL SPK DISTANCE (for the left front speaker),
FR SPK DISTANCE (for the right front speaker),
CENTER SPK DISTANCE (for the center speaker),
LS SPK DISTANCE (for the left surround speaker),
RS SPK DISTANCE (for the right surround speaker),
SB SPK DISTANCE (for the surround back speaker)
Select to apply 6.1-channel reproduction to both 5.1-channel
and 6.1-channel encoded software.
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MOVIE
Select to apply “PLIIx MOVIE” (6.1-channel) reproduction to
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.
Adjustable range: 0.3 m to 9.0 m in 0.3 m intervals
EX/ES/PLIIx: PLIIx MUSIC
(1 ft to 30 ft in 1 ft intervals)
Select to apply “PLIIx MUSIC” (6.1-channel) reproduction to
both 5.1-channel and 6.1-channel encoded software.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10 ft) for all speakers
EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF
Select to cancel the EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.
C
R
L
Initial setting: EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO
3.3 m
(11 ft)
3.0 m
(10 ft)
2.7 m
(9 ft)
* For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-
channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied even though
you have selected “EX/ES/PLIIx: AUTO.” In this case, select
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”
2.4 m
(8 ft)
From the remote control
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
2.1 m
(7 ft)
LS
RS
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Press EX/ES repeatedly to select an
appropriate setting for your
enjoyment.
SB
In this case, set the distance as follows:
Left front speaker (L):
Right front speaker (R):
Center speaker (C):
“FRONT L: 3.0m (10ft)”
“FRONT R: 3.0m (10ft)”
“CENTER: 3.0m (10ft)”
Left surround speaker (LS): “SURROUND L: 2.7m (9ft)”
Right surround speaker (RS): “SURROUND R: 2.7m (9ft)”
Surround back speaker (SB): “SURROUND BACK: 2.4m (8ft)”
NOTES
NOTES
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When “SURROUND SPEAKER” is set to “SURROUND SPK:
NO” (see page 21).
• You cannot set the speaker distance for the speakers you have
set to “NO.”
– When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source.
• When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK
SPK: NO” (see page 21), the Virtual Surround Back (see page
38) is applied to EX/ES/PLIIx (6.1-channel) reproduction.
• If you change one of these settings manually, the distance
manually set will be applied instead of those set by using Smart
Surround Setup.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the main or sub channel
—DUAL MONO
You can select the playback sound (channel) you want while
playing digital software recorded (or broadcasted) in Dual Mono
mode (see page 36), which includes two monaural channels
separately.
Setting bass sound
7 Setting subwoofer output—SUBWOOFER OUT
You can select the type of the signal which can be transmitted
through the subwoofer. In other words, you can determine
whether or not the bass elements of the front speaker channels
are transmitted through the subwoofer regardless of the front
speaker size setting (either “SMALL” or “LARGE”).
DUAL MONO: MAIN
Select to play back the main channel (Ch 1).*
Signal indicator “L” lights up while playing back this channel.
SUBWFR OUT: LFE
Select to emit only the LFE signals (while playing Dolby
Digital and DTS software) or the bass elements of the
“SMALL” front speakers (while playing any source other than
above).
DUAL MONO: SUB
Select to play back the sub-channel (Ch 2).*
Signal indicator “R” lights up while playing back this channel.
SUBWFR OUT: LFE+MAIN
DUAL MONO: ALL
Select to always emit the bass elements of the front speaker
channels (MAIN). While playing Dolby Digital and DTS
software, the bass elements and the LFE signals are both
emitted.
Select to play back both the main and sub-channels (Ch 1/Ch 2).*
Signal indicators “L” and “R” light up while playing back these
channels.
Initial setting: DUAL MONO: MAIN
Initial setting: SUBWFR OUT: LFE
* Dual Mono signals can be heard from the following speakers—L
(left front speaker), R (right front speaker), and C (center
speaker), with respect to the current Surround setting:
NOTE
When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “SUBWOOFER: NO” (see page
21), this function is not available.
With Surround Activated
Without
Surround
Center speaker setting
Dual Mono
setting
SMALL/LARGE
NO
7 Setting the crossover frequency—CROSSOVER
L
R
L
C
Ch 1
R
L
R
Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sounds efficiently. If
you use a small speaker in any position, this receiver
automatically reallocates the bass sound elements assigned to
the small speaker to the large speakers.
MAIN
SUB
ALL
Ch 1 Ch 1
Ch 2 Ch 2
Ch 1 Ch 2
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch1
Ch 2
Ch 2
Ch 1+Ch 2
Ch 1+Ch 2 Ch 1+Ch 2
To use this function properly, set this crossover frequency level
according to the size of the small speaker connected.
• If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 21),
this function will not take effect (“CROSSOVER: OFF” appears).
NOTE
The Dual Mono format is not identical with bilingual broadcasting
for TV programs. So this setting does not take effect while
watching such bilingual programs.
CROSSOVER: 80Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 12 cm.
CROSSOVER: 100Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 10 cm.
CROSSOVER: 120Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 8 cm.
CROSSOVER: 150Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is about 6 cm.
CROSSOVER: 200Hz Select when the cone speaker unit built in
the speaker is less than 5 cm.
Initial setting: CROSSOVER: 150Hz
NOTE
Crossover frequency is not valid for the HEADPHONE and 3D
HEADPHONE modes.
7 Setting the low frequency effect attenuator
—LFE ATT
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, set the LFE level to eliminate
distortion.
• This function takes effect only when the LFE signals come in.
LFE ATT: 0dB
Normally select this.
LFE ATT: –10dB Select when the bass sound is distorted.
Initial setting: LFE ATT: 0dB
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Midnight mode
—MIDNIGHT MODE
You can enjoy a powerful sound at night using the Midnight mode.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
Setting the digital input (DIGITAL IN)
terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3
When you use the digital input terminals, register what
components are connected to which terminals—DIGITAL IN 1/2/3
(see page 11) so that the correct source name will appear when
you select the digital source.
Select one of the following components for each terminal:
MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF
Select when you want to enjoy surround with its full dynamic
range. (No effect applied.)
DVR/DVD For the DVD player (or DVD recorder).
MIDNIGHT MODE: 1
DBS
VCR
TV
For the DBS tuner.
For the VCR.
For the TV.
Select when you want to reduce the dynamic range a little.
MIDNIGHT MODE: 2
Select when you want to apply the compression effect fully
(useful at night).
Initial setting: DVR/DVD (for “DIGITAL IN 1”)
DBS (for “DIGITAL IN 2”)
Initial setting: MIDNIGHT MODE: OFF
VCR (for “DIGITAL IN 3”)
From the remote control
NOTES
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
• You cannot assign the same component for different terminals.
The priority order for assignment is as follows:
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
“DIGITAL IN 1” > “DIGITAL IN 2” > “DIGITAL IN 3.”
“DIGITAL IN 1” can be set to any component.
Press SOUND, then press MIDNIGHT
repeatedly to select either one of the
above.
Ex.: When “DIGITAL IN 1” is set to “TV.”
DIGITAL IN 1:
TV
NOTE
“DVR/DVD,” “DBS,” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL
IN 2.”
And when “DIGITAL IN 2” is set to “DVR/DVD.”
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
DIGITAL IN 1:
DIGITAL IN 2:
TV
DVR/DVD
“DBS” and “VCR” are selectable for “DIGITAL IN 3.”
• Setting “DIGITAL IN 1” affects “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN
3” settings. When you have changed “DIGITAL IN 1,” confirm the
components assigned to “DIGITAL IN 2” and “DIGITAL IN 3.”
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the component video input
mode—DVD VIDEO INPUT/VCR VIDEO
INPUT
When you use the component video inputs for connecting the
DVD recorder (or DVD player) or VCR, register the type of video
input jacks.
Converting S-video signals into composite
video signals—DOWN MIX
You can select whether or not to convert S-video signals into
composite video signals.
DOWN MIX: ON Select to convert S-video signals into
composite video signals.
If you have not selected appropriate video input jacks, you cannot
view the playback picture on the TV or the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system cannot operate properly (see page 40).
DOWN MIX: OFF Select not to use this function.
Initial setting: DOWN MIX: OFF
For the DVD recorder or DVD player (DVD VIDEO):
NOTES
DVD VIDEO: S/C
• This function is available when satisfying all the following
requirements:
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to
the composite video or S-video input jacks.
– When a video component is connected to this receiver
through at least one of the S-video input terminals.
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this
receiver through at least one of the composite video output
jacks.
DVD VIDEO: COMPONENT
Select when connecting the DVD recorder (or DVD player) to
the component video input jacks.
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to
“S/C” (see left column).
Initial setting: DVD VIDEO: S/C
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)
For the VCR (VCR VIDEO):
VCR VIDEO: S/C
Select when connecting the VCR to the composite video or S- Converting composite video signals into S-
video input jacks.
video signals—Y/C SEPARATE
VCR VIDEO: COMPONENT
You can select whether or not to convert composite video signals
Select when connecting the VCR to the component video
come from a video component into S-video signals.
input jacks.
Y/C SEPARATE: ON
Select to convert composite video signals
into S-video signals.
Initial setting: VCR VIDEO: S/C
Y/C SEPARATE: OFF Select not to use this function.
Superimposing the menus
—SUPERIMPOSE
You can select whether or not to superimpose the on-screen
display on the TV screen.
Initial setting: Y/C SEPARATE: OFF
NOTES
• This function is available when satisfying all the following
requirements:
SUPERIMPOSE: ON
– When a video component is connected to this receiver
through at least one of the composite video input jacks.
– When a video component or the TV is connected to this
receiver through at least one of the S-video output terminals.
– Either the DVD VIDEO INPUT or VCR VIDEO INPUT is set to
“S/C” (see left column).
Select to superimpose the on-screen display on the TV
screen.
SUPERIMPOSE: OFF
Select to cancel superimposition. The on-screen display will
be shown on the blue background screen.
• When using this function, set the input mode of the TV correctly.
(Refer also to the manual supplied with the TV.)
Initial setting: SUPERIMPOSE: ON
NOTES
• Some on-screen displays appear on the TV screen regardless
of this setting.
• The on-screen display does not appear on the TV screen when
connecting the TV through the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
jacks (see page 10).
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sound adjustments
You can make sound adjustment to your preference after
completing basic setting.
Basic adjustment items
You can adjust the following items. See pages in parentheses for details.
• You cannot select the items which is not available with the current setting.
• The name of the item shown below is the on-screen display indication and the name in parentheses is the display indication.
Items and to do
SUBWOOFER LEVEL (SUBWFR LVL)
BASS BOOST (BASS BOOST)
Adjust the subwoofer output level. (29)
Boost the bass level. (30)
FRONT L LEVEL (FRONT L LVL)
SUBWFR PHASE (SBWFR PHASE)
Adjust the left front speaker output level. (29)
Select the subwoofer sound phase. (30)
FRONT R LEVEL (FRONT R LVL)
INPUT ATT (INPUT ATT)
Adjust the right front speaker output level. (29)
Attenuate the input level of analog source. (30)
CENTER LEVEL (CENTER LVL)
EFFECT (EFFECT)
Adjust the center speaker output level. (29)
Adjust the effect level. (31)
SURR. L LEVEL (SURR L LVL)
PANORAMA (PANORAMA)
Adjust the left surround speaker output level. (29)
Add wraparound sound effect with side-wall image. (31)
SURR. R LEVEL (SURR R LVL)
CENTER GAIN (CENTER GAIN)
Adjust the right surround speaker output level. (29)
Adjust the sound localization of the center channel. (31)
SURR. BACK LEVEL (S BACK LVL)
CENTER TONE (CENTER TONE)
Adjust the surround back speaker output level. (29)
Make the center tone soft or sharp. (31)
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz (D EQ 63Hz)*
CNTR ALIGNMENT (CNTR ALIGN)
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz (D EQ 250Hz)*
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz (D EQ 1kHz)*
Align the vertical localization of the center channel. (31)
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz (D EQ 4kHz)*
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz (D EQ 16kHz)*
Adjust the equalization pattern of each band. (30)
* If you have used Smart Surround Setup on pages 16 and 17, these settings are not required.
Operation through on-screen display menus
You can make adjustments to the basic settings easily by using the on-screen display menus.
Menu operation buttons
On the front panel:
From the remote control:
When operating the receiver
using the remote control,
set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Button / JOG
To do
ADJUST button show adjustment item previously selected.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous ADJUST MENU.
Button
To do
MULTI JOG
• select a menu or an item.
• change a setting.
MENU button show “TOP MENU.”
5 / ∞ buttons select a menu or an item.
SET button
move to the selected menu or return to the
previous ADJUST MENU.
2 / 3 buttons change a setting.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menu configuration
• Items on the menus shown below are all set to the initial values when shipping from the factory.
• Some of the menus or some items on the menu cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted depending on the current settings and the
connections. (For details, see the respective explanations in this section.)
• The “ADJUST MENU (3)” screen cannot be shown depending on the current settings and the connections.
ADJUST MENU (3)
TOP MENU
TOP MENU
ADJUST MENU (1)
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
ADJUST MENU (1)
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
FRONT L LEVEL
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
SURR. L LEVEL
SURR. R LEVEL
:
:
:
:
:
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
:ENTER
:EXIT
SURR. BACK LEVEL :
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
SURROUND L LEVEL
SURROUND R LEVEL
SURROUND BACK LEVEL
ADJUST MENU (2)
ADJUST MENU (2)
5
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz
BASS BOOST
DIGITAL EQ 63Hz :
DIGITAL EQ 250Hz :
DIGITAL EQ 1kHz :
DIGITAL EQ 4kHz :
DIGITAL EQ 16kHz :
0
0
0
0
0
BASS BOOST
∞
: OFF
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
ADJUST MENU (3)
ADJUST MENU (3)
SUBWOOFER PHASE
INPUT ATT
EFFECT
5
SUBWFR PHASE : NORMAL
INPUT ATT
EFFECT
: NORMAL
:
:
:
:
3
OFF
0.3
3
PANORAMA
CENTER GAIN
CENTER TONE
CNTR ALIGNMENT:
OFF
∞
PANORAMA
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
CENTER GAIN
CENTER TONE
CENTER ALIGNMENT
ADJUST MENU (1)
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu operating procedure
When operating, the on-screen display appears on the TV screen regardless of the SUPERIMPOSE setting (see page 25).
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
In this section, the operation of the remote control is used for explaining.
Ex.:When adjusting subwoofer output level.
Operations
On the TV screen
On the display
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
1 To show “TOP MENU,” press MENU.
Then press 5 or ∞ to select “ADJUST
MENU.”
x
ATT
TOP MENU
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
“SETTING” appears.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
:ENTER
:EXIT
“TOP MENU” appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
2 To select “ADJUST MENU,” press SET.
x
ATT
ADJUST MENU (1)
HP
MHz
kHz
5
SUBWOOFER LEVEL :
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FRONT L LEVEL
FRONT R LEVEL
CENTER LEVEL
SURR. L LEVEL
SURR. R LEVEL
:
:
:
:
:
The submenu previously
selected appears.
SURR. BACK LEVEL :
∞
:ENTER
:TOP MENU
The adjustment item previously selected
appears.
3 To select the desired submenu, press
5 or ∞ repeatedly.
There are three screens from “ADJUST MENU (1)”
to “ADJUST MENU (3).” To change the screen,
simply pressing 5 or ∞ repeatedly.You can go to
the next/previous screen.
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
4 Press SET.
x
ATT
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
HP
MHz
kHz
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
The current setting of the
selected item appears.
23:OPERATE
:BACK
The selected submenu appears.
O P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
5 To adjust the selected item, press 2 or
3 repeatedly, then press SET.
x
ATT
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
HP
MHz
kHz
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
The on-screen display returns to the previous
ADJUST MENU. In this example, “ADJUST MENU
(1)” appears on the TV screen and “SUBWFR LVL”
appears on the display.
–10
0
+10
• On the front panel, turn MULTI JOG, then press
SET.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to set other items
if necessary.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
• To return to “TOP MENU,” press MENU on the remote control.
• To exit from menu operations, press MENU on the remote
control when “TOP MENU” appears. On the front panel, press
ADJUST when a menu except “TOP MENU” appears.
• The adjustment item previously selected can be shown on the
TV screen by pressing ADJUST on the front panel when the
receiver is in normal operation mode.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
2
1, 3
Button indications on the screen
The buttons for operating the menu are shown on the TV
screen.You can operate the menu with these buttons.
1
Press TEST TONE to check the speakers’ output
balance.
TOP MENU
• On the TV screen, “TEST TONE” appears. The
indicator corresponding to the speaker appears while a
test tone comes out of the speakers.
EX.:
5
SETTING MENU
ADJUST MENU
∞
TEST TONE
SW+1 L+5 C 0 R-3
:ENTER
:EXIT
LS+5
RS+5
Usable buttons and their functions
SUBWOOFER LEVEL
SB+5
SUBWOOFER
:2
0
3
• On the display, “TEST L” starts flashing, and a test tone
comes out of the speakers in the following order:
23:OPERATE
:BACK
Usable buttons and their functions
C
R
L
SW
LS
Adjusting the items
RS
When performing the basic settings viewing the indications
on the display, the indications are slightly different from what
is shown on the on-screen display.
This is because of the limited number of characters shown
on the display.
SB
2
Adjust the speaker output levels.
To adjust the left front speaker level (L), press
FRONT L +/–.
Ex.: • “SUBWOOFER: +10” is shown as “SUBWFR +10” on
the display.
To adjust the right front speaker level (R), press
FRONT R +/–.
• “BASS BOOST: ON” is shown as “B BOOST ON” on
the display.
To adjust the center speaker level (C), press
CENTER +/–.
To adjust the left surround speaker level (LS), press
SURR L +/–.
Adjusting speaker output level
• SUBWOOFER LEVEL (subwoofer output level),
• FRONT L LEVEL (left front speaker output level),
• FRONT R LEVEL (right front speaker output level),
• CENTER LEVEL (center speaker output level),
• SURROUND L LEVEL (left surround speaker output level),
• SURROUND R LEVEL (right surround speaker output level),
• SURROUND BACK LEVEL (surround back speaker output
level)
To adjust the right surround speaker level (RS), press
SURR R +/–.
To adjust the surround back speaker level (SB), press
S.BACK +/–.
To adjust the subwoofer level (SW), press SUBWFR +/–.
3
Press TEST TONE again to stop the test tone.
You can adjust the speaker output levels.
Adjust all the speakers’ output levels so that you can listen to the
sounds from all the speakers at the same level.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
NOTES
• You can adjust the speaker output levels without the test tone.
• No test tone comes out of the speakers and no speaker
indication appears on the TV screen corresponding to the
speaker which is set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see
page 21).
Adjustable range: –10 (dB) to +10 (dB) (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all speakers
• No test tone is available when the headphone is in use or
“DVD MULTI” is selected.
NOTES
• If you have selected “NO” for a speaker (see page 21), the
output level for the corresponding speaker is not adjustable.
• While using the headphones, you can adjust only the left and
right front speakers’ output level.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the equalization patterns
Adjusting the bass sounds
—DIGITAL EQ 63Hz/250Hz/1kHz/4kHz/16kHz
You can adjust equalization patterns in five frequency bands
(center frequency: 63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz) for the
front speakers.
7 Reinforcing the bass—BASS BOOST
You can boost the bass level—Bass Boost.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
BASS BOOST: ON Select to boost the bass level.
The BASS indicator lights up on the display.
Adjustable range: –8 (dB) to +8 (dB) (in 2 dB intervals)
Initial setting: 0 (dB) for all bands
BASS BOOST: OFF Select to deactivate the Bass Boost.
• When adjustment is made, the EQ indicator lights up on the
display.
Initial setting: BASS BOOST: OFF
NOTE
If no adjustment is required, set all the frequency bands to
“0 (dB).”
This function affects only the sound coming out through the front
speakers.
• The EQ indicator goes off from the display.
From the remote control:
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
Before you start, remember...
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
Press SOUND, then press BASS
BOOST repeatedly.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
• Each time you press BASS BOOST, the
Bass Boost turns on and off alternately.
1
2
Press SOUND.
Press EQ FREQ repeatedly to
select the band you want to adjust.
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
3
4
Press EQ LEVEL 9/( to adjust
the equalization pattern of the
selected band.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust
other bands.
2
3
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
1
7 Selecting the subwoofer sound phase—
SUBWOOFER PHASE
You can change the subwoofer sound phase to your preference.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
PHASE: NORMAL
Normally select this.
PHASE: REVERSE Select this when you feel the bass sound is
better with this mode rather than with
“PHASE: NORMAL.”
Initial setting: PHASE: NORMAL
NOTE
This function takes effect only when “SUBWOOFER” is set to
“SUBWOOFER:YES” (see page 21).
7 Attenuating the input signal—INPUT ATT
When the input level of analog source is too high, the sound will
be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
source.
INPUT ATT: ON
Select to attenuate the input signal level.
The ATT indicator lights up on the display.
INPUT ATT: NORMAL Select to deactivate attenuation.
Initial setting: INPUT ATT: NORMAL
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Making the center tone soft or sharp
Adjusting the sound parameters for the
Surround/DSP modes
You can adjust the Surround/DSP sound parameters to your
preference.
—CENTER TONE
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes is
in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.
• This setting is common to all Surround modes, and is
memorized separately for DSP modes.
• For details about the Surround/DSP modes, see pages 34 to 39.
• You cannot adjust the center tone in the following cases:
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21).
– When Dual Mono software is played back.
– While listening with the headphones.
7 Adjusting the effect level for DSP modes
—EFFECT
This setting is available only when one of the DSP modes (except
ALL CH ST) is in use. To activate DSP mode, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
DSP mode.
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: CENTER TONE: 3
Adjustable range: 1 to 5 (in 1 step intervals)
Initial setting: EFFECT: 3
As the number increases, the dialogue becomes stronger.
Normally, select “3.”
• When the center tone is set to other than “CENTER TONE: 3,”
the C.TONE indicator lights up on the display.
As the number increases, the effect becomes stronger.
Normally, select “3.”
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
From the remote control:
You can also make adjustments the following way from the
remote control.
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Press SOUND, then press C.TONE
repeatedly.
Press SOUND, then press EFFECT
repeatedly.
NOTE
NOTE
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
After pressing SOUND, the numeric
buttons work for sound adjustments. To
use the numeric buttons to operate your
target source, press the corresponding
source selecting button before operation;
otherwise, the remote control may not
work as you intend.
7 Align the vertical localization of the center
7 Adjusting the panorama control for Pro Logic II
channel —CENTER ALIGNMENT
Music—PANORAMA
This setting is available when one of the Surround/DSP modes
(except “PLII MUSIC,” “PLIIx MUSIC,” “Neo:6 MUSIC,” and “ALL
CH ST”) is in use. To activate Surround/DSP mode, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized for each
Surround/DSP mode.
This setting is available only when Pro Logic II Music is in use. To
activate Pro Logic II Music, see page 39.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you
change the setting.
• You cannot adjust the center alignment in the following cases:
– When “CENTER SPEAKER” is set to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21).
PANORAMA: ON
Select to add “wraparound” sound effect with
side-wall image.
– When Dual Mono software is played back.
– While listening with the headphones.
PANORAMA: OFF Select to listen to originally recorded sound.
Initial setting: PANORAMA: OFF
C ALIGNMENT: ON Select when you cannot feel as if the actors
or singers are speaking or singing on the
screen.
7 Adjusting the sound localization of the center
C ALIGNMENT: OFF Select not to use this function.
channel—CENTER GAIN
Initial setting: C ALIGNMENT: OFF
This setting is available only when Neo:6 Music is in use.
• If you have set “CENTER SPEAKER” to “CENTER SPK: NO”
(see page 21), the center gain is not adjustable.
• Once you have made an adjustment, it is memorized until you
change the setting.
Adjustable range: 0 to 1.0 (in 0.1 step intervals)
Initial setting: CENTER GAIN: 0.3
As the number increases, the center channel will be localized
clearly.
Normally, select “0.3.”
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuning in to stations manually
From the remote control ONLY:
Tuner operations
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates
between “FM” and “AM.”
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
Tuner operations are mainly done from the remote control.
2 Press repeatedly or hold TUNING 9 or
( TUNING until the station you want is tuned
in.
• Pressing (or holding) TUNING 9 increases the frequency.
• Pressing (or holding) ( TUNING decreases the frequency.
NOTES
• When you hold and release TUNING 9 or ( TUNING, the
frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in.
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the
TUNED indicator lights up on the display.
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST (stereo)
indicator also lights up.
When operating the
receiver using the remote
control, set the mode
selector to “AUDIO/TV/
VCR/DBS.”
Using preset tuning
Once a station is assigned a channel number, the station can be
quickly tuned simply by selecting the number.You can preset up to
30 FM and 15 AM stations.
To store the preset stations
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
From the remote control ONLY:
1 Tune in to the station you want to preset (see
“Tuning in to stations manually” above).
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the
FM reception mode” on page 33.
NOTE
When you have selected “FM” or “AM” by using SOURCE
SELECTOR on the front panel, the remote control may not
work for tuner operations. To use the remote control for tuner
operations, select “FM” or “AM” by using the source selecting
button on the remote control.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
2 Press MEMORY.
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for
about 5 seconds.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to
select a channel number while the channel
number position is flashing.
On the front panel:
2 1, 3
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
Before you start, remember...
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
1 Turn SOURCE SELECTOR to select “FM” or
“AM.”
4 Press MEMORY again while the selected
channel number is flashing on the display.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.
The selected channel number stops flashing.
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.
2 PressTUNER PRESET.
“P” appears on the display and MULTI JOG now works for
selecting preset channels.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the
stations you want.
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select a preset channel
To erase a stored preset station
number while “P” appears on the display.
Storing a new station on a used channel number erases the
previously stored one.
• To increase the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG
clockwise.
• To decreases the preset channel numbers, turn MULTI JOG
counterclockwise.
To tune in a preset station
From the remote control:
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
1 Press FM/AM to select the band.
The last received station of the selected band is tuned in and
the numeric buttons now work for tuner operations.
• Each time you press the button, the band alternates
between “FM” and “AM.”
Selecting the FM reception mode
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.
• You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station
(see page 32).
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
2 Press the numeric buttons (1 – 10, +10) to
From the remote control ONLY:
select a preset channel number.
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode
alternates between “AUTO MUTING” and “MONO.”
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
ATT
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
HP
MHz
kHz
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO MUTING
Normally select this.
When a program is broadcast in stereo,
you will hear stereo sound; when in
monaural, you will hear monaural sound.
This mode is also useful to suppress
static noise between stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator lights up on the display.
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
MONO
Select this to improve the reception (but
stereo effect will be lost).
In this mode, you will hear noise while
tuning in to the stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator goes off from the
display. (The ST indicator also goes off.)
Initial setting: AUTO MUTING
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introducing the Surround modes
■ Dolby Digital*
Dolby Digital is a digital signal compression method, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, and enables multi-channel encoding and
decoding.
Creating realistic
sound fields
• When Dolby Digital signal is detected through the digital input,
the DOLBY D indicator lights up on the display.
Dolby Digital 5.1CH
Dolby Digital 5.1CH (DOLBY D) encoding method records and
digitally compresses the left front channel, right front channel,
center channel, left surround channel, right surround channel, and
LFE channel signals (total 6 channels, but the LFE channel is
counted as 0.1 channel. Therefore, called 5.1 channel).
Dolby Digital enables stereo surround sounds, and sets the cutoff
frequency of the surround treble at 20 kHz, compared to 7 kHz for
Dolby Pro Logic. As such, the sound movement and “being-there”
feeling are enhanced much more than Dolby Pro Logic.
Reproducing theater ambience
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to
reproduce impressive multi-channel sound, reaching you from all
directions.
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound
movement can be expressed.
Surround/DSP modes built in this receiver can create almost the
same Surround sound as you can feel in a real movie theater.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) is a digital surround encoding
format that adds the third surround channels, called “surround
back.”
Compared to the conventional Dolby Digital 5.1CH, these newly
added surround back channels can reproduce more detailed
movements behind you while viewing the video software. In
addition, surround sound localization will become more stable.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Dolby Surround
■ DTS**
DTS is another digital signal compression method, developed by
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., and enables multi-channel
encoding and decoding (1ch up to 6.1ch).
• When DTS signal is detected through the digital input, the DTS
indicator lights up on the display.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is a multi-channel playback format to convert
2-channel software into 5-channel (plus subwoofer). The matrix-
based conversion method used for Dolby Pro Logic II makes no
limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and
enables stereo surround sound.
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic II modes—
Pro Logic II Movie (PLII MOVIE) and Pro Logic II Music (PLII
MUSIC).
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete 5.1 channel
digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.
Compared to Dolby Digital, the DTS Digital Surround format has a
lower audio compression rate which enables it to add breadth and
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround
features natural, solid, and clear sound.
When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the
up on the display.
indicator lights
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded
software.You can enjoy a sound field very close
to the one created with discrete 5.1-channel
sounds.
DTS Extended Surround (DTS-ES)
Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo
DTS-ES is another multi-channel digital encoding format.
It greatly improves the 360-degree surround impression and
space expression by adding the third surround channel—surround
back channel.
software.You can enjoy wide and deep sounds.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DTS-ES includes two signal formats with different surround signal
recording methods—DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch (ES DISCRETE)
and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch (ES MATRIX).
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1ch has been designed to encode (and
decode) a 6.1-channel signal discretely to avoid interference with
each channel.
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1ch has been designed to add an extra
surround channel to DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel. By using a
matrix encoding/decoding method, an additional “surround back”
channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right
surround channel signals.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a newly introduced multi-channel playback
format to convert not only multi-channel software but 2-channel
software into 6.1 channel (or 7.1 channel) that developed from
Dolby Pro Logic II. The matrix-based conversion method used for
Dolby Pro Logic IIx makes no limitation for the cutoff frequency of
the surround treble.
• This receiver provides two types of Dolby Pro Logic IIx modes—
Pro Logic IIx Movie (PLIIx MOVIE) and Pro Logic IIx Music
(PLIIx MUSIC).
When Dolby Pro Logic IIx is activated, the
lights up on the display.
indicator
** “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
PLIIx MOVIE Suitable for playing any Dolby Surround encoded
software.You can enjoy a sound field with a
natural wraparound effect.
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
PLIIx MUSIC Suitable for playing any 2-channel stereo
software.You can enjoy wide and deep 6.1-
channel sounds.
• To enjoy software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the
source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this
receiver. (See page 11.)
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using Surround mode, the sounds come out of the
activated speakers which the Surround mode requires.
DTS 96/24
In recent years, there has been increasing interest in higher
sampling rates both for recording and for reproducing at home.
Higher sampling rates allow wider frequency range and greater bit
depths provide extended dynamic range.
DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format (fs 96 kHz/24
bits) introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc. to deliver “better-
than-CD sound quality” into the home.
• When DTS 96/24 signal is detected, the DTS and 96/24
indicators light up.You can enjoy its 5.1-channel sound with full-
quality.
• If either the surround speakers or center speaker is set to
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), the corresponding
channel signals are allocated to and emitted through the front
speakers.
• If both the surround speakers and center speaker are set to
“NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-
PHONIC processing (which has been developed to create the
surround effect through the front speakers only) is used. The 3D
indicator lights up on the display.
3D HEADPHONE mode
DTS Neo:6
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the Surround
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated
without respect to the type of software played back.
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,
and HP indicators light up.
DTS Neo:6 is another conversion method to create 6-channel
(plus subwoofer) from analog/digital 2-channel software by using
the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix
6.1ch.
• This receiver provides the following DTS Neo:6 modes—Neo:6
Cinema (NEO:6CINEMA) and Neo:6 Music (NEO:6 MUSIC).
When one of them is activated, the NEO:6 indicator lights up on
the display.
About other digital signals
Linear PCM
NEO:6CINEMA Suitable for playing movies.You can get the
same atmosphere with 2-channel software as
with 6.1-channel software. It is also effective for
playing software encoded with conventional
surround formats.
Uncompressed digital audio data used for DVDs, CDs, and
Video CDs.
DVDs support 2 channels with sampling rates of 48/96 kHz, at
quantization of 16/20/24 bits. On the other hand, CDs and
Video CDs are limited to 2 channels with 44.1 kHz at 16 bits.
• When Linear PCM signal is detected, the LPCM indicator
lights up.
NEO:6 MUSIC Suitable for playing music software. The front
channel signals bypass the decoder (resulting in
no loss of sound quality) and the surround
signals transmitted through the other speakers
expand the sound field naturally.
Dual Mono
Dual Mono can be easily understood when you think of the
bilingual broadcast for TV programs (however, the Dual Mono
format is not identical with those analog formats).
This format is now adopted in Dolby Digital, DTS, and so on. It
allows two independent channels (called main channel and
sub-channel) to be recorded separately.
• You can select either channel you want to listen to (see
page 23).
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When using the DAP mode, the sounds come out of all the
connected and activated speakers.
Introducing the DSP modes
• If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing
(which has been developed to create the surround effect
through the front speakers only) is used.
The sound heard in a concert hall, club, etc. consists of direct
sound and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from
behind. Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any
reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the
distances of the ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and
indirect sounds are the most important elements of the acoustic
surround effects.
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.
■ MONO FILM
The DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes can create these
important elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling.
In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening
room while viewing monaural sound video software (analog and
2-channel digital signals including Dual Mono signal), you can use
this mode.
The surround effect will be added, and the sound localization of
actor’s words will be improved.
Reflections from behind
Early reflections
This mode cannot be used for multi-channel digital signals.
When “MONO FILM” is used, sounds come out of all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
• If the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker
setting (see page 21), JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC processing
(which has been developed to create the surround effect
through the front speakers only) is used.
The 3D indicator lights up on the display.
• If incoming signals change from 2-channel digital signal to
another digital signal type, “MONO FILM” is canceled and an
appropriate Surround mode is activated.
Direct sounds
The DSP modes include the following modes:
• Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes—HALL1, HALL2, LIVE
CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2
• MONO FILM—Used for all types of 2-channel signals (including
Dual Mono signal)
■ All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
• All Channel Stereo mode (ALL CH ST)
This mode cannot be used if the surround speakers are set
to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).
When one of the DSP modes is activated, the DSP indicator lights
up on the display.
■ Digital Acoustic Processor (DAP) modes
You can use the following DAP modes in order to reproduce a
more acoustic sound field in your listening room.
HALL1
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large
shoebox-shaped hall designed primarily for
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about
2000.)
Sound reproduced from
normal stereo
Sound reproduced from All
Channel Stereo mode
HALL2
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large
vineyard-shaped hall designed primarily for
classical concerts. (Its seating capacity is about
2000.)
3D HEADPHONE mode
LIVE CLUB
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a live music club
with a low ceiling.
If you connect a pair of headphones while one of the DSP
modes is in use, the 3D HEADPHONE mode is activated
without respect to the type of software played back.
“3DHEADPHONE” appears on the display and the DSP, 3D,
and HP indicators light up.
DANCE CLUB Reproduces the spatial feeling of a rocking dance
club.
PAVILION
THEATER1
THEATER2
Reproduces the spatial feeling of an exhibition
hall with a high ceiling.
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a large theater
where the seating capacity is about 600.
Reproduces the spatial feeling of a small theater
where the seating capacity is about 300.
NOTE
When “THEATER1” or “THEATER2” is activated while playing
back 2-channel analog or digital source, the built-in Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder is activated and the
indicator lights up.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Surround/DSP modes
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the speaker settings and the incoming signals. See the table below.
• The numbers inside the parentheses following the incoming signal type indicate the number of the front channels and that of the
surround channels. For example, (3/2) indicates that the signals are encoded with three front signals (left/right/center) and two (stereo)
surround signals.
• For EX/ES/PLIIx setting, see page 22.
The name of the mode shown below is the display indication.
EX/ES/PLIIx setting
Incoming Signal Type
AUTO
ON
PLIIx MOVIE
PLIIx MUSIC
OFF
Dolby Digital Surround EX
DOLBY D EX*2*5
DOLBY D EX*2
DOLBY D EX*2*3
D + PLIIx MU*2
DOLBY D
Dolby Digital (3/2, 2/2)
Dolby Digital (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)
Dolby Digital (Dual Mono)
DTS-ES Discrete*1
DOLBY D
DOLBY D EX*2
DOLBY D EX*2*3
DOLBY D
D + PLIIx MU*2
DOLBY D
DUAL MONO
ES DISCRETE*2 ES DISCRETE*2
DTS +
DTS +
DTS +
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
EX*2*3 DTS + PLIIx MU*2
DTS
DTS
DTS
DTS-ES Matrix*1
ES MATRIX*2
DTS
ES MATRIX*2
DTS (3/2, 2/2)*1
DTS + NEO:6*2
DTS (3/1, 2/1, 3/0, 1/0)
DTS (Dual Mono)
DTS
DUAL MONO
Dolby Digital (2/0)
DTS (2/0)
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
NEO:6CINEMA
NEO:6 MUSIC
PLIIx MOVIE*4/PLIIx MUSIC*4/NEO:6CINEMA/NEO:6 MUSIC
Lenear PCM
Analog
DVD MULTI
None
*1 DTS 96/24 processing is not applied when the EX/ES/PLIIx setting is activated. If you want to apply the processing, set the EX/ES/
PLIIx setting to “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” (see page 22).
*2 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), Virtual Surround Back is activated for the
modes.
*3 When using PLIIx Movie to reproduce Dolby Digital or DTS software, this receiver applies Dolby Digital EX (DOLBY D EX) or DTS plus
Dolby Digital EX (DTS +
EX) processing (6.1-channel reproduction) to the software.
*4 When “SURROUND BACK SPEAKER” is set to “SURR. BACK SPK: NO” (see page 21), “PLIIx MOVIE” is changed to “PLII MOVIE”
and “PLIIx MUSIC” is changed to “PLII MUSIC.”
*5 For some Dolby Digital Surround EX software, Dolby Digital 5.1-channel reproduction (“DOLBY D”) may be applied. In this case, select
“EX/ES/PLIIx: ON” to apply “DOLBY D EX.”
About the DSP modes
• The following DSP modes are available regardless of incoming signal type:
HALL1, HALL2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, PAVILION, THEATER1, THEATER2
• When an incoming signal is a multi-channel (more than 2-channel) digital signal, “MONO FILM” is not available.
• You cannot select “ALL CH ST” when the surround speakers are set to “NO” in the speaker setting (see page 21).
Virtual Surround Back
This function creates the great surround effect from the behind as if you have connected the surround back speaker. The VIRTUAL
SB (Surround Back) indicator lights up on the display.
If you have connected (and activated) the surround speakers, you can use Virtual Surround Back without connecting the surround
back speaker.
Virtual Surround Back is activated when “EX/ES/PLIIx” is set to other than “EX/ES/PLIIx: OFF” and when playing back the software
including the following signals:
– Dolby Digital Surround EX
– DTS-ES
– Dolby Digital or DTS with more than 4-channels
Virtual Surround Back is activated when one of the Surround modes is selected.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On the front panel:
2
Activating the Surround/DSP modes
Available Surround/DSP modes vary depending on the incoming
1, 3
signals. For details, see page 38.
Activating one of the Surround/DSP modes automatically
recalls the memorized settings and adjustments.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
• To adjust the speaker output level, see page 29.
• To adjust the effect level for the DSP mode (except All
Channel Stereo mode,) see page 31.
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD
MULTI.”
• To add “wraparound” sound effect to “PLII MUSIC”
(PANORAMA control,) see page 31.
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or
digital) correctly.
• To adjust the sound localization of the center channel
for “NEO:6 MUSIC” (center gain,) see page 31.
2 Press SURROUND.
• To adjust the vertical localization of the center channel
for Surround/DSP modes (except “PLII MUSIC,”“PLIIx
MUSIC,”“Neo6: MUSIC,” and “ALL CH ST”) (center
alignment,) see page 31.
MULTI JOG now works for selecting Surround/DSP modes.
3 Turn MULTI JOG to select the Surround/DSP
mode you want.
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-
channel software:
NOTES
• You cannot use any Surround/DSP modes when selecting “DVD
MULTI” as the playback source.
• The on-screen display appears on the TV screen to show the
Surround/DSP mode name for 5 seconds when you select the
Surround/DSP mode.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO SURR
HALL1
Surround modes*
HALL2
To cancel the function, set “SUPERIMPOSE” to
“SUPERIMPOSE: OFF” (see page 25).
LIVE CLUB
PAVILION
THEATER2
ALL CH ST
(Back to the beginning)
DANCE CLUB
THEATER1
MONO FILM
SURR OFF
From the remote control:
1
When operating the receiver
using the remote control, set the
mode selector to
To cancel Surround/DSP modes
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
Turn MULTI JOG so that “SURR OFF” appears on the display.
NOTE
The initial setting is “AUTO SURR.”
* Available Surround modes vary depending on the incoming
signals. For details, see “Using the Surround/DSP modes” on
page 38.
2
1 Select and play any source other than “DVD
When you select “AUTO SURR” (Auto Surround)
You can enjoy the Surround mode easily.
MULTI.”
• For details about the Surround modes, see pages 34 to 36.
• When “AUTO SURR” is activated, the AUTO SR indicator lights
up on the display.
• Make sure you have selected the input mode (analog or
digital) correctly.
2 Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the
How does “AUTO SURR” work?
Surround/DSP mode you want.
• If a multi-channel signal comes in, an appropriate Surround
mode will be selected automatically.
Ex.: When “DOLBY D” is selected for Dolby Digital multi-
channel software:
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal with
surround signal comes in, “PLII MOVIE” will be selected.
• If a Dolby Digital 2-channel or DTS 2-channel signal without
surround signal, or a Linear PCM signal comes in, “SURR
OFF (stereo)” will be selected.
EQ C.TONE VIRTUAL SB AUDIO P. BASS TA NEWS INFO RDS TUNED ST AUTO MUTING SLEEP AUTO MODE
LPCM
L
C
R
PL
NEO : 6
DSP 3D
AUTO SR
ATT
HP
MHz
kHz
DOLBY D
DTS AAC
96 / 24
S . WFR LFE
LS SB RS
AUTO SURR
HALL1
Surround modes*
HALL2
NOTES
LIVE CLUB
PAVILION
THEATER2
ALL CH ST
(Back to the beginning)
DANCE CLUB
THEATER1
MONO FILM
SURR OFF
• “AUTO SURR” does not take effect in the following cases:
– While playing an analog source.
– While selecting one of the fixed digital decode modes—
“DOLBY D” or “DTS” (see page 13).
• While listening with the headphones, the 3D HEADPHONE
mode (see pages 36 and 37) is activated without respect to the
type of software played back.
To cancel Surround/DSP modes
• When “AUTO SURR” is selected, sound may not come out at
the beginning of playback. If it occurs, select a Surround mode
manually.
Press SURROUND repeatedly so that “SURR OFF” appears on
the display.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections 2: Video cable connection
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—
composite video, S-video, and component video, and the signals
coming into this receiver through one type of video terminals can
output only through the terminal of the same type. So you need to
connect the video components to this receiver using one of the
following three ways.
• When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set
the video input for the DVD player and the VCR correctly (see
“Selecting the component video input mode—DVD VIDEO
INPUT/VCR VIDEO INPUT” on page 25); otherwise, the correct
input for this receiver will not be selected on the TV.
AV COMPU LINK
remote control
system
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to
operate JVC’s video components (TV, DVD player*, and VCR)
through this receiver.
Case 1*:
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the S-video terminals, connect this receiver to the
TV’s video input 1 terminal using S-video cables.
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which has
added a function to operate JVC’s video components through the
component video jacks. To use this remote control system, you
need to connect the video components you want to operate,
following the diagrams below and the procedures on page 41.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components.
S-video cable
S-video cable
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
* “DVD player” on pages 40 and 41 can be replaced with “DVD
recorder.”
To video input 1
Connections 1: AV COMPU LINK connection
Case 2*:
TV
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the composite video jacks, connect this receiver
to the TV’s video input 2 terminal (composite video input)
using composite video cables.
AV
AV
COMPU LINK-III
COMPU LINK EX
Composite video cable
Composite video cable
Monaural mini-plugs
(not supplied)
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
To video input 2
(Composite)
AV
COMPU
LINK-III
Case 3:
220V
110V
127V
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver
through the component video jacks, connect this receiver
to the TV’s video input 2 terminals (component video
input) using component video cables.
230 -
240V
Component video cable
Component video cable
Monaural
mini-plugs
(not supplied)
AV
COMPU LINK
Source
equipment
RX-F31S
TV
To video input 2
(Component)
DVD player
AV
COMPU LINK
* When using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, set
“DOWN MIX” and “Y/C SEPARATE” to “OFF”; otherwise, this
system does not work correctly. For details about each setting,
see page 25.
VCR
IMPORTANT:
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the
DBS tuner connected to the DBS IN jacks.
NOTES
• When connecting the receiver and aTV with the AV COMPU LINK
EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode (see page 41).
• When connecting only the VCR and DVD player to this receiver,
connect it directly to the receiver using cable with the monaural
mini-plugs.
• You can connect only the TV with AV COMPU LINK EX or AV
COMPU LINK-III terminal to the AV COMPU LINK-III terminal.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-touch DVD play
Connecting procedure
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input
jacks on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to
“DVR/DVD” or “DVD MULTI.”
1 If you have already plugged your VCR, DVD
player,TV, and this receiver into the AC
outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to
“DVR/DVD DGT.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
2 Connect your VCR, DVD player,TV, and this
receiver as follows, using the cables with the
monaural mini-plugs (not supplied).
• See “Connections 1” on the previous page.
3 Connect the audio input/output jacks on the
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using
the audio cables.
Automatic selection of TV’s input mode
• When you select “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL”) as the source to play on
the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to
the TV tuner so that you can watch TV.
• When you select “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD DGT”), “DVD
MULTI,” “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”), or “DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL”)
as the source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically
changes the input mode to the appropriate position (either video
input 1 or video input 2) so that you can view the playback
picture.
• See pages 7 to 10.
4 Connect the video input/output jacks on the
VCR, DVD player,TV, and this receiver using
the S-video cables, composite video cables,
or component video cables.
• See “Connections 2” on the previous page.
5 Plug the AC power cords of the connected
components and this receiver into the AC
outlets.
NOTE
This function does not work when you connect this receiver and
the TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal using a component
video cable. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to Case 1 or
Case 2 on page 40.
6 When turning on the TV for the first time after
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV
volume to the minimum using the TV volume
control on the TV.
Automatic power on/off
The TV, DVD player, and VCR turn on and off along with the
receiver.
7 Turn on other connected components first,
then turn on this receiver.
When you turn on the receiver;
• If the previously selected source is “TV” (or “TV DIGITAL”) or
“DBS” (or “DBS DIGITAL”), only the TV will turn on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “DVR/DVD” (or “DVR/DVD
DGT”) or “DVD MULTI,” the TV and DVD player will turn on
automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”),
the TV and VCR will turn on automatically.
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, DVD player, and VCR will
turn off.
• When turning on the VCR, use the remote control supplied
with this receiver (press VCR
).
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use
the five basic functions listed below.
Remote control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR using this
remote control
See pages 42 and 43 for details.
NOTE
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each
component.
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR, the VCR
will not turn off, but continue recording.
One-touch video play
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the
VCR, you can enjoy the video playback without setting other
switches manually. The receiver automatically turns on and
changes the source to “VCR” (or “VCR DIGITAL”).
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the
play (3) button on the VCR or on the remote control. So, you can
get the same result.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 VCR
Operating other
JVC products
Set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
You can use the supplied remote control to operate not only
this receiver but also other JVC products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.
Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals—
remote codes “A” and “B.”
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to
“A,” set the manufacturer’s code to “01.”
– When operating a VCR whose remote control code is set to
“B,” set the manufacturer’s code to “02.”
The initial setting is “01.” For details about the setting, see
“Changing the transmittable signals for operating a VCR” on
page 45.
• To operate other products, aim the remote control directly at the
remote sensor on the target product.
You can always perform the following operation:
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.
:
7 TV
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations on
the VCR.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers on the VCR.
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.
Start playback.
1 – 9, 0:
3:
Set the mode selector to
“AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.
Fast-wind a tape.
¡:
1:
Rewind a tape.
REC PAUSE:
Enter recording pause. To start recording,
press this button then 3.
7 DVD recorder or DVD player
To operate the DVD
recorder, set the mode
selector to “DVR.”
You can always perform the following operations:
To operate the DVD player,
set the mode selector to
“DVD.”
TV
:
Turn on or off the TV.
TV VOL +/–:
TV/VIDEO:
Adjust the volume on the TV.
Change the input mode (either video input
or TV tuner) on the TV.
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on the
TV.
CHANNEL +/–:
1 – 9, 0, 100+:
Change the channel numbers.
Select the channel numbers.
TV RETURN (10): Function as the TV RETURN button.
(Switches between the previous channel
and the current channel.)
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After setting the mode selector correctly, you can perform the
following operations on the DVD recorder or DVD player.
For various playback:
(one touch replay):
See the instructions supplied with the DVD recorder or DVD
player for details.
Move the playback position back 10 seconds
before the current position.
RETURN:
CANCEL:
Return to the main menu during menu
operation.
7 Changing the remote control code for DVD
recorder
Cancel the programmed track, etc.
Some JVC DVD recorders can accept four types of the control
signals.You can assign one of the four codes to the remote
control supplied with this receiver for operating your DVD
recorder. For details, refer to the manual supplied with the
DVD recorder.
Only for DVD recorder operations:
CHANNEL +/–: Change the channel numbers.
Initial setting: 03
DVD/HDD:
Select the DVD recorder or HDD deck. (Only for
a DVD recorder incorporated with HDD deck.)
1 Set the mode selector to “DVR.”
(skip):
Move the playback position ahead 30 seconds
after the current position.
2 Press and hold DVR/DVD
3 Press DVR/DVD.
.
1 – 9, 0:
Select a channel number (while stopped) or a
chapter/title number, track number (while playing
back). Press ENTER to enter the number.
4 Enter the remote control code you want using
buttons 1 – 4, and 0.
REC MODE:
REC PAUSE:
Select the recording mode.
EX.: To enter the code “2”, press 0, then 2.
Enter recording pause. To start recording,
press 3.
Code for DVR
Number to enter
1
2
3
4
01
02
03
04
DISPLAY:
Change the display information.
Only for DVD player operations:
5 Release DVR/DVD
.
fs/Rate*:
Show the sampling frequency.
Now, the remote control code has been changed.
TITLE/GROUP: Make the numeric buttons work for selecting the
title/group number.
You can always perform the following operation:
ZOOM:
Zoom in and out.
DVR/DVD
3:
:
Turn on or off the DVD recorder or DVD player.
Start playback.
1 – 10, 0, +10: Select a chapter/title number, track number,
menu item, etc.
DVD/CARD:
Select the disc or memory card to play. (Only for
a DVD player incorporated with memory card
slots.)
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback. To release it, press 3.
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.
¢:
4:
DIMMER:
THUMBNAIL:
SLIDE:
Change the display brightness.
Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) chapter.
Show the thumbnail screen for JPEG discs.
Start the slide show playback for JPEG discs.
¡:
1:
Fast-forward playback.
Fast-reverse playback.
3D/S.EFFECT: Apply the 3D effect.
PAGE: Show browsable still pictures on DVD Audio
discs.
TOP MENU/MENU:
Display the menu recorded on discs.
* Press and hold when using these buttons.
ON SCREEN:
5/∞/3/2:
ENTER:
Shows the on-screen bar.
Select an item on the menu screen.
Enter the selected item, channel number,
chapter/title number, or track number (if
required).
If these buttons do not function normally, use the remote
control supplied with your DVD recorder or DVD player.
Refer also to the manuals supplied with the DVD recorder
or DVD player for details.
You can also use the following buttons to operate JVC DVD
recorder and/or DVD player if it supports the corresponding
function:
For various settings:
AUDIO:
SUBTITLE:
SET UP:
VFP:
Select the audio language/channel.
Select the subtitle language.
Display the Preference display.
Show the picture adjustment screen.
PROGRESSIVE*: Change the scanning mode.
ANGLE: Select the view angle.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturers’ codes for TV
Manufacturer
Codes
Operating other
manufacturers’
products
JVC
Akai
01
02
03
04
05
Bell+Howell
Centurion
Coronad
Daewoo
Emerson
Fisher
06, 07, 08
09, 10, 11, 12, 13
14
GE•Pana
GE•RCA
Gold Star
Hitachi
15, 16
17
18, 19
20, 21
22, 23
24
25
25
By changing the transmittable signals, you can use the
supplied remote control to operate other manufacturers’
products.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with the other products.
• To operate those components with the remote control, first you
need to set the manufacturers’ codes each for the TV, VCR, and
DBS.
• After replacing batteries of the remote control, set the
manufacturers’ codes again.
KTV
Magnavox
Marantz
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
Philips
26, 27
24
Pioneer
Proscan
Quasar
Radioshack
RCA
28
29
30
31
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a TV
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
02, 17, 32, 33, 34, 35
Samsung
Sanyo
Sears
36, 37
14
38
1 Press and hold TV
2 Press TV.
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
Sharp
Sony
39
40
1 – 9, and 0.
Symphonic
Toshiba
Zenith
41, 42
38
43, 44
See “Manufacturers’ codes for TV” on the right.
4 Release TV
.
Now, you can perform the following operations on the TV.
Initial setting: 01
TV
:
Turn on or off the TV.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
TV VOL +/–:
TV/VIDEO:
Adjust the volume on the TV.
Change the input mode (either TV or
VIDEO).
After pressing TV, you can perform the following operations on
the TV.
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers.
Select the channel numbers.
1 – 9, 0, 100+ (+10):
See the instructions supplied with the TV for details.
5 Try to operate your TV by pressing TV
.
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of TV, try each
one until the correct one is entered.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturers’ codes for VCR
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a VCR
Manufacturer
JVC
Codes
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
01, 02, 03, 04
1 Press and hold VCR
2 Press VCR.
.
Aiwa
Akai
Bell+Howell
Daewoo
Emerson
Fisher
05
06, 07, 08
09
10
11, 12, 13, 14, 15
16, 17, 18, 19
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
1 – 9, and 0.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for VCR” on the right.
G.E.
20, 21
22
23
24
25
20, 26
4 Release VCR
.
Go Video
Gold Star
Go-Video A
Go-Video B
Hitachi
Now, you can perform the following operation on the VCR.
VCR Turn on or off the VCR.
:
Magnavox
Mitsubishi
NEC
27, 28, 29
30, 31, 32, 33
34, 35
After pressing VCR, you can perform the following operations
on the VCR.
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
Samsung
Sanyo
Scott
Sharp
Shintom
Sony
Symphonic
Teknica
Toshiba
Zenith
36, 37
27
38
39, 40, 41
16, 17, 18, 19
42
43, 44
45
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51
52
53, 54
55
56
CHANNEL +/–:
Change the channel numbers on the
VCR.
1 – 9, 0:
3:
Select the channel numbers on the VCR.
Start playback.
7:
Stop playback.
8:
Pause playback.
¡:
1:
Fast-wind a tape.
Rewind a tape.
See the instructions supplied with the VCR for details.
5 Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR
.
Initial setting: 01
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of VCR, try each
one until the correct one is entered.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
❏ Changing the transmittable signals for operating
a DVD player
a DBS tuner
Set the mode selector to “DVD.”
Set the mode selector to “AUDIO/TV/VCR/DBS.”
1 Press and hold DVR/DVD
2 Press DVR/DVD.
.
1 Press and hold DBS
2 Press DBS.
.
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
3 Enter the manufacturer’s code using buttons
1 – 9, and 0.
1 – 9, and 0.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player” below.
See “Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner” below.
4 Release DVR/DVD
.
4 Release DBS
.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DVD
player.
Now, you can perform the following operation on the DBS
tuner.
DVR/DVD
:
Turn on or off the DVD player.
DBS
:
Turn on or off the DBS tuner.
3:
Start playback.
After pressing DBS, you can perform the following operations
on the DBS tuner.
1:
Return to the beginning of the current
chapter (or fast-forward for some models).
¡:
Skip to the beginning of the next chapter
(or fast-reverse for some models).
CHANNEL +/–:
1 – 9, 0:
Change the channel numbers on the
DBS tuner.
7:
Stop playback.
Select the channel numbers on the
DBS tuner.
8:
Pause playback.
MENU:
Display the menu recorded on DVD
VIDEO discs.
See the instructions supplied with the DBS tuner for details.
5/∞/3/2:
ENTER:
1 – 9, 0:
Select an item on the menu screen.
Enter the selected item.
5 Try to operate your DBS tuner by pressing
DBS
.
When your DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the
correct code.
Select the chapter number.
See the instructions supplied with the DVD player for details.
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DBS tuner,
try each one until the correct one is entered.
5 Try to operate your DVD player by pressing
DVR/DVD
.
Manufacturers’ codes for DBS tuner
When your DVD player turns on or off, you have entered the
correct code.
Manufacturer
Codes
Echostar
G.I.
40
01, 41
02
03, 04, 05, 06
42
43
07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15
16, 17, 18
19
20, 21, 22
23, 24, 44
25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
31, 32
45
If more than one code is listed for your brand of DVD player,
try each one until the correct one is entered.
Gemini
Hamlin
Hitachi
Hughes
Jerrold
Manufacturers’ codes for DVD player
Manufacturer
JVC
Hitachi
Codes
01
12
Macom
Magnavox
Oak
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Primestar
RCA
S. Atlanta
Samsung
Sony
Kenwood
Mitsubishi
Onkyo
Panasonic
Philips
05, 08
10
15, 16
04
07
Pioneer
Samsung
Sony
03
14
02
46
33, 34, 35
36
Toshiba
Yamaha
06
09
47
Tocom
Toshiba
Zenith
37
48
38, 39
Initial setting: 01
NOTE
You cannot use this remote control to operate other
manufacturers’ DVD recorder.
Initial setting: 01
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without
notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot
operate the equipment.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If
there are any problems you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s
service center.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
The power cord is not plugged in.
SOLUTION
The power does not come on.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
The receiver turns off (enters standby
mode).
Speakers are overloaded because of high
volume.
1. Stop the playback source.
2. Turn on the receiver again, then turn the
volume down.
Speakers are overloaded because of a
short circuit at the speaker terminals.
Check the speaker wiring. If speaker wiring
is not short-circuited, contact your dealer.
The receiver is overloaded because of a
high voltage.
Consult your dealer after unplugging the
power cord.
“OVER HEAT” flashes on the display,
then the receiver turns off.
The receiver is overloaded because of high Turn on the receiver again. If the receiver
volume or long time usage.
turns off soon, consult your dealer after
unplugging the power cord.
No sound from speakers.
Speaker signal cables are not connected.
Check speaker wiring, then reconnect if
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging
the power cord.
Connections are incorrect.
Check the audio connections (see pages 7
to 11) after unplugging the power cord.
An incorrect source is selected.
Muting is activated.
Select the correct source.
Press MUTING to cancel the mute (see
page 15).
An incorrect input mode (analog or digital)
is selected.
Select the correct input mode (analog or
digital).
TV Direct is activated.
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).
Sound from one speaker only.
Speaker signal cables are not connected
properly.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if
necessary (see page 6) after unplugging
the power cord.
Bass sound is reinforced too much
when listening in stereo.
Appropriate bass level is not selected.
The sounds may be intermittently distorted
Adjust audio position level (see page 14).
Sounds are intermittently distorted or
the noise is heard by the outside noise or the noise may be heard by the outside
This is not a malfunction. But if this
continues, turn on the receiver again.
such as a lightning discharge.
noise such as a lightning discharge but the
sound will be restored automatically.
No picture is displayed on the monitor. Connections are incorrect.
Input mode is incorrect.
Check the video connections (see pages 7
to 10) after unplugging the power code.
Check the component video input mode
(see page 25).
Remote control does not operate as
you intend.
The remote control is not ready for your
intended operation.
Set the mode selector correctly, then press
the corresponding source selecting button
or SOUND before operation
Remote control does not work.
There is an obstruction hiding the remote
sensor on the receiver.
Remove the obstruction.
Batteries are weak.
Replace batteries.
The mode selector is set to the incorrect
position.
Set the mode selector to the proper
position.
Buttons cannot be used.
TV Direct is activated.
Deactivate TV Direct (see page 14).
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM Incoming signal is too weak.
reception.
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact
your dealer.
The station is too far away.
Select another station.
The wrong antenna is being used.
Check with your dealer to be sure you have
the correct antenna.
Antennas are not connected properly.
Check the connections.
Occasional cracking noise during FM
reception.
Ignition noise from automobiles.
Move the antenna farther from automobile
traffic.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Specifications
Composite video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-video: DVR/DVD, VCR, DBS:
Y (luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
C (chrominance, burst):
Component: DVR/DVD, VCR:
Y (luminance):
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
PB, PR:
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Video Output Level/Impedance:
Designs and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Composite video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-video: DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
Y (luminance):
C (chrominance, burst):
Component: MONITOR OUT:
Y (luminance):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Amplifier
Output Power
0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω
At stereo operation:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Negative
Front channels:
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10%
total harmonic distortion.
PB, PR:
Synchronization:
At surround operation:
Front channels:
100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
FM tuner (IHF)
Tuning Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
Monaural:
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
Center channel:
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 Ω at
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Monaural:
Surround channels: 100 W* per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
16.0 dBf (1.7 µV/75 Ω)
37.5 dBf (20.5 µV/75 Ω)
Stereo:
Stereo Separation at OUT(REC): 35 dB at 1 kHz
Surround back channel:
100 W*, min. RMS, driven into 6 Ω at
1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total
harmonic distortion.
AM tuner
Tuning Range:
* Measured on AC 110 V, 127 V, 220 V, and 240 V.
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz
Audio
General
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Power Requirements:
AC 110 V/127 V/220 V/230 V – 240 V
adjustable with the voltage selector,
50 Hz/60 Hz
,
DVR/DVD (DVD MULTI), VCR, DBS, TV:
330 mV/47 kΩ
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)*:
Power Consumption:
120 W (at operation)
Coaxial: DIGITAL IN 1(DVR/DVD):
5 W (in standby mode)
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Optical: DIGITAL IN 2(DBS), 3(VCR):
–21 dBm to –15 dBm
Dimensions (W x H x D): 435 mm x 70 mm x 317.2 mm
Mass: 6.3 kg
(660 nm 30 nm)
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS (with
sampling frequency—32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).
Audio Output Level:
DVR, VCR, MONITOR OUT:
330 mV
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/DIN): 80 dB/62 dB
Frequency Response (8 Ω):
Bass Boost:
20 Hz to 20 kHz ( 1 dB)
+4 dB 1 dB at 100 Hz
Equalization (at DSP operation):
Center frequency:
Control range:
63 Hz, 250 Hz, 1 kHz, 4 kHz, 16 kHz
8 dB
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
AM LOOP
SUBWOOFER CENTER
SURR-R
SURR-L
1(DVR/DVD) 2(DBS)
3(VCR) DIGITAL OUT
VOLTAGE
ANTENNA
CAUTION:SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE 6 – 16
SELECTOR
110V
Y
PB
PR
220V
FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND
PCM/
STREAM
BACK
VCR
RIGHT LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
FM 75
SPEAKERS
VIDEO
VIDEO
IN
DVD MULTI IN
AM EXT
COAXIAL
DIGITAL IN
AUDIO
230 -
240V
L
127V
DVR/DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
R
AV
VCR
DVR/DVD
IN
SUB-
VCR
DVR
OUT (REC)
DVR/DVD
IN (PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
IN
MONITOR
OUT
COMPU
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
DVR
OUT
(REC)
IN
DBS
IN
TV
IN
MONITOR
OUT
WOOFER
OUT (REC)
(PLAY)
(PLAY)
OUT
LINK-III
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
220V
230 -
240V
127V
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your
mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the
position of the voltage selector switch provided on
the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset
the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
EN
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0605RYMMDWJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Indesit Freezer C 139 UK User Manual
Intel Computer Hardware 8I945PE FS User Manual
JL Audio Car Speaker SB GM CLREXT 10W3v2 User Manual
John Deere Lawn Mower 6230 ROPS User Manual
Johnson Controls Door S1 CD065T01 User Manual
JVC Car Stereo System LVT2089 001A User Manual
Jwin CD Player JX CD7160 User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop 8285364 User Manual
KitchenAid Dishwasher KUDI01FL User Manual
KitchenAid Oven KGSK901SBL02 User Manual